‫‪<ğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷û]<í¥†e‬‬

‫‪<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú‬‬
‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E‬‬
‫‪ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<í¥†e‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﰎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﹸﺘﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﹸﺘﺒﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺳﻄﺮﹰﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻛﻴﻒ ﲤﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻔﻜﲑ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ CAD/CAM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﲝﺜﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬

‫_‪DTIíÛ×ÓÖ]E<ì]ù]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﻐﻴﺔ ﲢﻀﲑ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ T‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﲞﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪236‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬ ‫‪ = T05‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫)‪(0‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﰲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ؛ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ T5‬ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﲎ ‪.T05‬‬

‫‪ÄŞÏÖ]<l]æ_<éÇi‬‬
‫ﻉ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .M06‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺪ ِ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﰒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M06‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ( ‪N01…T01‬‬‫)ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺰ( )‪ T01‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻐﲑ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﹰﺎ( ‪N02…M06 T02‬‬
‫…‪N03‬‬
‫‪N04…M06 T03‬‬
‫…‪N05‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N01‬ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪ (T01‬ﰲ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N02‬ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T01‬ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T02‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N03‬ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T01‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N04‬ﺗ‪‬ﻐﻴ‪‬ﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T01‬ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T02‬ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T03‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N05‬ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T02‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻯ‬ ‫»‪«0‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﺛﺔ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ؛ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ‪ M6‬ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﲎ ‪.M06‬‬

‫_‪DFIíÛ×ÓÖ]E<íè„ÇjÖ]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ )ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ )ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪.F‬‬
‫‪237‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ = F20‬ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 20‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ = F.006‬ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ .006‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 20‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪) G20‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ( ﻣﻔ ‪‬ﻌ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪) G21‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳌﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﻣﻔﻌ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ G00‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬
‫ﻼ‪ -‬ﳚﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﱪﳎﺔ ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪-‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G01‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ = F20.0‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 20‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ = F500.‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 500‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ = F2.‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ = F50‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ =F.02‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 0.02‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ = F0.50‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ = F.002‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 0.002‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ = F0.050‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ 0.05‬ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫_‪DSIíÛ×ÓÖ]E<íÖû]<…ç¦<á]…æ<톉<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﻌﻄﹶﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ S‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪.(rev/min‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :S1200‬ﲤﺜﻞ ‪ 2100‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪238‬‬

‫ﻳ‪‬ﺘﺒ‪‬ﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ S‬ﲞﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻌﱪ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ S0‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺜﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﻴﺎﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ S‬ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﳍﺎ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﳎﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳉﺄ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻨ‪‬ﻌﲔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫)‪30-1200 (rev/min‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫)‪800-4000 (rev/min‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬

‫)‪(G-Codes‬‬ ‫]‪<íè–vjÖ]<…]æù‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑﻳﺔ ‪ G-Codes‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑـ ‪ .G-Codes‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G-Codes‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G-Codes‬ﳘﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ :00‬ﻏﲑ ﳕﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻰ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻔﱠﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ :01‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﳕﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑﻳﺔ ‪ G-Codes‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻴﻔﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟـ ‪ G-Codes‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﲡﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺷﲑ ﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ )*(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟـ ‪ G-Codes‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪239‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﻲ‪ (G40) :‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭ)‪ (G49‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭ )‪ (G80‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫)‪ (G17‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ .XY‬ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﳍﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻴﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺻﻐﲑﺓ ﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻣ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ‬ ‫‪G21‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﳌﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪G21‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ( ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪G20‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﲑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﺿﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﻷواﻣﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮﻳﺔ‪G-codes -‬‬ ‫اﻟﺠﺪول )‪(1-4‬‬

‫‪G-Code‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫‪*G00‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫‪*G01‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺨﻄﻲ )وﻓﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬
‫‪G02‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺪاﺋﺮي أو اﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻲ )ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪G03‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺪاﺋﺮي أو اﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻲ )ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪G04‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫زﻣﻦ دوران أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(Dwell‬‬
‫‪G09‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪*G15‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫‪G16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*G17‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي ‪XY‬‬
‫‪G18‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي ‪XZ‬‬
‫‪G19‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي ‪YZ‬‬
‫‪G20‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪G21‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪*G22‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪود اﻟﺸﻮط اﻟﻤﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﻟﺬاآﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪ON‬‬
‫‪G23‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪود اﻟﺸﻮط اﻟﻤﺨﺰن ﺑﺎﻟﺬاآﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪OFF‬‬
‫‪G27‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪G28‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪G29‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪G30‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ أو اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬

‫‪G-Code‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫‪G33‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺮار‬
‫‪G37‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎس ﻃﻮل أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫‪*G40‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎت أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪G41‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر‬
‫‪G42‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪G43‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ إزاﺣﺔ ﻃﻮل أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬
‫‪G44‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ إزاﺣﺔ ﻃﻮل أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪(-‬‬
‫‪G45‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫زﻳﺎدة إزاﺣﺔ اﻷداة‬
‫‪G46‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫إﻧﻘﺎص إزاﺣﺔ اﻷداة‬
‫‪G47‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫زﻳﺎدة إزاﺣﺔ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار اﻟﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫‪G48‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫إﻧﻘﺎص إزاﺣﺔ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار اﻟﻀﻌﻒ‬
‫‪*G49‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ إزاﺣﺔ ﻃﻮل اﻷداة‬
‫‪*G50‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء أﻣﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ وﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس‬
‫‪G51‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ وﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس‬
‫‪G53‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺒﺪؤهﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ اﻵﻟﺔ(‬
‫‪*G54‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬
‫‪G55‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪2‬‬
‫‪G56‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪3‬‬
‫‪G57‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪4‬‬
‫‪G58‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪5‬‬
‫‪G59‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ ‪6‬‬
‫‪G60‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ وﻓﻖ اﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻮر واﺣﺪ‬
‫‪G63‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﻘﻠﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪G68‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت‬
‫‪*G69‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت‬
‫‪G73‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ وﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎت ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ -‬اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ‬
‫‪G74‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﻘﻠﻮﻇﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪G76‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة إﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻗﻄﺎر اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*G80‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء دورة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪G81‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ‪-‬اﻟﻤﺮآَﺰَة )اﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮة(‬
‫‪G82‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ‪-‬ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺎآﺴﺔ‬
‫‪G83‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ‬
‫‪241‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪G-Code‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫‪G84‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة اﻟﻘﻠﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫‪G85‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ‬
‫‪G86‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ‬
‫‪G87‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﻬﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺎآﺴﺔ‬
‫‪G88‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ‬
‫‪G89‬‬ ‫‪09‬‬ ‫دورة ﺣﻔﺮ اﻟﺘﺠﺎوﻳﻒ‬
‫‪*G90‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪*G91‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺰاﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪G92‬‬ ‫‪00‬‬ ‫اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ أو ﻋﺪد اﻟﺪورات اﻟﻘﺼﻮى ﻟﻤﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫‪*G94‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪G95‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ دورة ﻣﻦ دورات ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫‪G96‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*G97‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*G98‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ دورة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪G99‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ R‬ﻓﻲ دورة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ )*( ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺘﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻗﻼﻉ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .RESET‬ﺗ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ G90 ،G01 ،G00‬ﻭ‪ G91‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﻷواﻣﺮ اﻟﻤﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ ‪M-Codes‬‬ ‫اﻟﺠﺪول )‪(2-3‬‬

‫‪M-Code‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪M00‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪M01‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪M02‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪون إﻋﺎدة ﻟﻒ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫‪M03‬‬ ‫دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪M04‬‬ ‫دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪M05‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫‪M06‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪M07‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ رذاذ‬
‫‪M08‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪M09‬‬ ‫إﻳﻘﺎف ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪242‬‬

‫‪M-Code‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪M10‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دوران ﻃﺎوﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ )إﻳﻘﺎف دوران اﻟﻄﺎوﻟﺔ(‬
‫‪M11‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ دوران ﻃﺎوﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ )اﻟﻄﺎوﻟﺔ ﺗﺪور(‬
‫‪M13‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬أﻣﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ أو ﻣﺰدوج‬
‫‪M14‬‬ ‫دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎرب اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬أﻣﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ أو ﻣﺰدوج‬
‫‪M16‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ أدوات اﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪M19‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫‪M21‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ وﻓﻖ اﻟﻤﺤﻮر ‪X‬‬
‫‪M22‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ وﻓﻖ اﻟﻤﺤﻮر ‪Y‬‬
‫‪M23‬‬ ‫إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫‪M30‬‬ ‫إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ إﻋﺎدة ﻟﻒ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫‪M98‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪M99‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻮدة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻗﺔ "‪ "M-Codes‬ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﻭﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ‪.‬‬

‫]‪<íÏת¹]<l^ém]‚uý]<Ý^¿ße<í¥Ö‬‬
‫‪íè‚è]ˆjÖ]<l^ém]‚uý]<Ý^¿Þæ‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪،X‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ .Z‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ ‪ B ،A‬ﻭ‪.C‬‬

‫)‪(G90‬‬ ‫]‪<íÏת¹]<l^ém]‚uý^e<í¥Ö‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪.(-‬‬
‫‪243‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫)‪(G91‬‬ ‫]‪<íè‚è]ˆjÖ]<l^ém]‚uý^e<í¥Ö‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻘﻪ‪) .‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (1-4‬ﺳﻮﺍ ًﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﰲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(1-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺠﺪول )‪(3-4‬‬

‫‪For G90‬‬ ‫‪For G91‬‬

‫‪P1‬‬ ‫‪G90 X0 Y0‬‬ ‫‪P1‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪P2‬‬ ‫‪G90 X0 Y4‬‬ ‫‪P2‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y4‬‬
‫‪P3‬‬ ‫‪G90 X2 Y4‬‬ ‫‪P3‬‬ ‫‪G91 X2 Y0‬‬
‫‪P4‬‬ ‫‪G90 X2 Y5‬‬ ‫‪P4‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y1‬‬
‫‪P5‬‬ ‫‪G90 X4 Y6‬‬ ‫‪P5‬‬ ‫‪G91 X2 Y1‬‬
‫‪P6‬‬ ‫‪G90 X4 Y7‬‬ ‫‪P6‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y1‬‬
‫‪P7‬‬ ‫‪G90 X6 Y6‬‬ ‫‪P7‬‬ ‫‪G91 X2 Y-1‬‬
‫‪P8‬‬ ‫‪G90 X8 Y8‬‬ ‫‪P8‬‬ ‫‪G91 X2 Y2‬‬
‫‪P9‬‬ ‫‪G90 X8 Y4‬‬ ‫‪P9‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪244‬‬

‫‪For G90‬‬ ‫‪For G91‬‬

‫‪P10‬‬ ‫‪G90 X5 Y4‬‬ ‫‪P10‬‬ ‫‪G91 X-3 Y0‬‬
‫‪P11‬‬ ‫‪G90 X5 Y3‬‬ ‫‪P11‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y-1‬‬
‫‪P12‬‬ ‫‪G90 X7 Y3‬‬ ‫‪P12‬‬ ‫‪G91 X2 Y0‬‬
‫‪P13‬‬ ‫‪G90 X7 Y2‬‬ ‫‪P13‬‬ ‫‪G91 X0 Y-1‬‬
‫‪P14‬‬ ‫‪G90 X3 Y0‬‬ ‫‪P14‬‬ ‫‪G91 X4 Y-2‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬ ‫‪G90 X0 Y0‬‬ ‫‪P1‬‬ ‫‪G91 X-3 Y0‬‬

‫]‪<íÏת¹]<l^ém]‚uý^e<í¥Ö‬‬
‫‪(G92)<l^ém]‚uý]<_‚f¹<ífŠßÖ^e‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﳜﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ )ﳐﻄﻂ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳ‪‬ﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪) (2-4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﹰﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪.(3-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(2-4‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻄﻰ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫…‪G92 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫‪245‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪G92‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﳏﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G92‬‬ ‫‪<†Úù]<]‚Âc‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛ ٍﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ )ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ ،(Z‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )‪ (Home‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﰒ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "position‬ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﰒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "PAGE‬ﻟﺘﺠﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "X‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻲ‬
‫"‪ ."ORIGEN‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪.Z‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(3-4‬‬

‫)‪(2-4‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻِﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﱪﺍﺗﻮﺭ( ﺇﱃ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﰒ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ MPG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺷﺮﺣﻪ ﰲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﲢﺮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪246‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(4-4‬‬

‫ﰒ ﺩﻭ‪‬ﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﺠ‪‬ﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ .G92 X10 Y5‬ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (3-4‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻼ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ‪‬ﺭ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﰒ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ‪ RPM1500‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ .(5-4‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﳓﻨﺎﺀ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺍﳓﻨﺎﺀ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻪ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪.position‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﰒ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ Y‬ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G92‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(5-4‬‬
‫‪247‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .X‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ X‬ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G92‬ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﺍﻟﱵ‬
‫ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻛﻼ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪Z‬‬
‫ﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻮ‪‬ﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫…‪G92 X…Y…Z‬‬

‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﹰﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪G59‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﺪﹰﺍ ﻭﺻﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ G54‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ G55‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ G56‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ G57‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ G58‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ G59‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(6-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪248‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G58 ،G57 ،G56 ،G55 ،G54‬ﻭ‪ G59‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻻﺣﻘﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﲢﻀﲑ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G59-G54‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪sÚ^ÞÖ]<‚éÖçi‬‬
‫…‪sÚ^ÞÖ]<ÜÎ‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ »‪ «O‬ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻳ‪‬ﺘﺒ‪‬ﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺫﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 1234‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ‪ O‬ﰒ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 1234‬ﻓﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)‪ .(O1234‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ = O0001‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪ = O0014‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ ،O‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪l^Ïé×Ãi‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ );( ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0001‬‬
‫)‪(PN587985-B‬‬
‫‪N9 M00‬‬
‫)‪(REMOVE CLAMPS FROM OUTSIDE OF PART‬‬
‫‪249‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫…‪Õç×fÖ]<ÜÎ‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ »‪ «N‬ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ( ﰒ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ N1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪..N2‬ﺇﱁ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ‪ 5‬ﲝﻴﺚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ N5‬ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ‪ .N10‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺿﺨﻤﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﲬﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺳﻴﺤﺼﻞ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﲤﻜﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫]‪êñˆ¢]<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﹰﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲝﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﲑ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M98‬ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ ،P‬ﻛﻼﳘﺎ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑ ‪ O‬ﰒ ﺗﺄﰐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0012‬‬
‫‪N0001‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬

‫…‬
‫…‬
‫‪N0126 M99‬‬

‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M99‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪M98 P0012‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.12‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬

‫‪O0001‬‬
‫‪N0001 G54 X.. Y..‬‬
‫… ‪N0002‬‬
‫… ‪N0003‬‬
‫…‬
‫…‬
‫…‬
‫…‬ ‫‪O00012‬‬ ‫‪O00013‬‬
‫…‬ ‫… ‪N0001‬‬ ‫… ‪N0001‬‬
‫…‬ ‫‪N0002‬‬ ‫…‬
‫‪N0125 M98 P0012‬‬ ‫…‬ ‫…‬
‫… ‪N0126‬‬ ‫…‬ ‫…‬
‫…‬ ‫‪N0018 M98 P0013‬‬ ‫…‬
‫…‬ ‫‪N0019‬‬ ‫…‬
‫…‬ ‫…‬ ‫…‬
‫‪N0287 M30‬‬ ‫‪N0075 M99‬‬ ‫‪N0032 M99‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ /12/‬ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ N0125‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N0018‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ‪.O0013‬‬
‫‪251‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪ O0013‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N0019‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪،O0012‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N0075 M99‬ﰒ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪N0126‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ .M0287 M30‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪M98 P0012 L2‬‬

‫‪ :L2‬ﺗﻌﲏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ‪ ،(M18‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫)‪M16‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ‬
‫ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪M98 P00010012‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :M98‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :P0001‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :0012‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪sÚ^ÞÖ]<íè^ãÞ‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ‪ M02‬ﻭ‪ M30‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ‪ M02‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ M30‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻼ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ :‬ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻳﺴﻠﻚ ‪ M02‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ‪.M30‬‬

‫‪G43‬‬ ‫]‪<æ<G92<àè†Úù]<°e<í×’Ö‬‬
‫ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ‪ Z‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻟﻠﻮﻫﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﳛﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﳛﲔ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G43‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺑﺈﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ .Z‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪Z‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪252‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،Z‬ﻭﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﰲ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G43‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G43‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫)ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ (H02,H01) H‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G43‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪) H‬ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ H‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪.(H01 = -11.1283 :‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ H‬ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺻﻔﱢﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﻟـ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﰒ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺣﱴ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﲤﺜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ H‬ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G43‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻪ ﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ H‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ‪ H‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨ ﱢﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(7-4‬‬

‫إذا آﺎﻧﺖ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﻟﻄﻮل اﻷداة اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻘﺪم اﻷداة ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ وﺗﺼﻄﺪم ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ اﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﻟﻸداة وﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ وﻟﻠﺪﻻﺋﻞ واﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪253‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪1<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪9×4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺳﻴﺜﻘﺒﺎﻥ ﰲ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻳﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪.005‬‬ ‫ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (8-4‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮآﺘﻚ‬

‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ‪:‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫اﺳﻢ اﻵﻟﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪WorkpieceZero X…Y…Z… :‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت )ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻒ )ﻧﻮع اﻷداة(‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰎ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳ ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﳌ ِﻌ ‪‬ﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﳜﺺ ﻭﳝﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﲑ‪.‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 254

(8-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

(9-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0001
N1 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49
N2 G92 X12. Y5. Z0 T02 S900 M03
N3 G00 X-2. Y-2.0
N4 G43 Z1. H01 M08
N5 G81 G99 Z-.219 R.1 F4.6
N6 G00 X-7. Y-2.0
N7 G80 Z1. M09
N8 G28 Z1.0
N9 M01
N10 M06
N11 G92 X12. Y5. Z0
N12 G00 G90 X-2. Y-2. S620 M03
‫‪255‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N13 G43 Z1. H02 M08‬‬

‫‪N14 G81 G99 Z-1.25 R.1 F7.0‬‬
‫‪N15 G00 X-7. Y-2.0‬‬
‫‪N16 G80 Z1. M09‬‬
‫‪N17 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N18 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N19 T01 M06‬‬
‫‪N20 M30‬‬

‫ﰎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺳﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﳕﺮﺓ )‪ (3‬ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪،N1‬‬
‫ﺗ‪‬ﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G40 ،G80 ،G20 ،G90‬ﻭ‪ G49‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :G90‬ﻳﺆﺳﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G20‬ﻳﺆﺳﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G80‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G40‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G41‬ﻭ‪.G42‬‬
‫‪ :G49‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G43‬ﻭ‪.G44‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N2‬ﰎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ )‪ (X12,Y5‬ﺇﱃ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ )‪ .(S900,M03‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ T02‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪) ،‬ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ .(N10‬ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N3‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N4‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﺰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Z = 1.000‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M08‬ﻳﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N5‬ﰎ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪.F = 4.6IPM‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N6‬ﰎ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N7‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪ G81‬ﻭﻳﺮﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ Z1.0‬ﻭﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.M09‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N8‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N9‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،M01‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (optional stop‬ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪ .ON‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T01‬ﻗﺪ ﺃﳒﺰﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪256‬‬

‫ﻳ‪‬ﻤﻜﱢﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺃﳒﺰﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻹﻋﻄﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﳒﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N10‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻵﻥ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺘﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 0.005‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻠﻌﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪RPM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬ ‫Š‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫Š‬

‫‪2<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0002 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻓﺎرزة ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ(‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ :Y ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ :Z ،‬اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺎدة اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :‬أﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮم‬

‫أﺑﻌﺎد اﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 3.×3.×1.5 :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻮازٍ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﻗﻮف ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ اﻷداة رﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
257 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

SFM = 400 ،‫رﻳﺸـﺔ ﺗﻔـﺮﻳـﺰ ﻟﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺎﺑـﻴـﻦ‬ T01
‫ﻗـﻄـﺮ اﻟﺠـﺰء اﻟﻤﻠﻮﻟـﺐ ﻣﻨـﻬـﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬5/8 (.625)
SFM = 400 6 ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( رﻗﻢ‬ T02
SFM = 400 ‫ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬1/2 ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻗﻄﺮ‬ T03

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0002
N10 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49
N15 G92 X21.025 Y6.127 Z0
N20 G00 X.4 Y-.1875 S2445 M03 T02
N25 G43 Z1. M08 H01
N30 G01 Z-.25 F20.0
N35 X-2.8125
N40 Y-2.8125
N45 X-.1875
N50 Y.4
N55 G28 Z1.0. M09
N60 M01
N65 M06
N70 G90 G80 G40 G49
N71 G92 X21.025 Y6.127 Z0
N75 G00 X-1.5 Y-1.5 S3057 M03 T03
N80 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N85 G81 G98 Z-.438 R.1 F12.0
N90 G80 M09
N95 G28 Z1.0
N100 M01
N105 M06
N110 G90 G80 G40 G49
N111 G92 X21.025 Y6.127 Z0
N115 G00 X-1.5 Y-1.5 S3057 M03 T01
N120 G43 Z1. H03 M08
N125 G81 G98 Z-1.664 R.1 F18.0
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪258‬‬

‫‪N130 G80 Z1.0 M09‬‬

‫‪N135 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N140 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N145 M06‬‬
‫‪N150 M30‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(10-4‬‬

‫‪á^Úù]<Õç×e<|†‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N10‬ﺑﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G-Codes‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪ G90‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ‪G91‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )‪ G20‬ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺻﺔ ﻭ‪ G21‬ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﻭﺗﻠﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ )‪ (G80‬ﻭﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ (G40‬ﻭﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ .(G49‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ )‪ (G80‬ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ‪ ،(N85‬ﹸﻓﻌ‪‬ﻠﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G81‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺎ )ﺗﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ( ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﰒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RESET‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ ‪-‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ -‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﱂ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪) .N9‬ﰲ ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ RESET‬ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) 1‬ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ .625‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺇﱃ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻗﻼﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪259‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G80‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N10‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G81‬ﺻﺎﳊﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﱵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ )ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (Y‬ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Z‬ﻭ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N85‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﱪﻣﺞ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﱪﻣﺞ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﻓﻴﻞ )ﺍﶈﻴﻂ( ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺐ ﲝﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ )ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺇﱃ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪) G41‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭ‪) G42‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻭﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺒ‪‬ﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ G40‬ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﺎﺭﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ H‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ .N25‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G49‬ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺈ‪‬ﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ‪ N55‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻠﻐﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪ ‪‬ﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ‪ G49‬ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪íè–vjÖ]<†Ú]æù]<î×Â<솿Þ‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ G-Codes‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ‪ .‬ﺇ‪‬ﺎ‬
‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،G81‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G91‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺔ ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪260‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳒﺎﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G00‬ﻭ‪ G01‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G02‬ﻭ‪ G03‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G00‬‬ ‫_‪<Ä膊Ö]<Ù^ÏjÞ÷]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (G00‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ A‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ B‬ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﻭﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ‪ X30 ،G00‬ﻭ‪ Y20‬ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪.(11-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(11-4‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜـﻦ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﳏـﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒـﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫»‪ «RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 25%‬ﺃﻭ ‪50%‬؛ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﲰﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﲔ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭﻭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﲞﻠﻮﺹ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 1.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪G01‬‬ ‫_‪<êŞ¤]<Ù^ÏjÞ÷]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ G01‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ )‪.(F‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪G01 X10. Y20. F8.0‬‬
‫‪261‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(12-4‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻔﱠﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﳏﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﲡﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫]‪3<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(13-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0003 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬أﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮم ‪ 6061-T6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ أﺑﻌﺎدهﺎ ‪ 3.5×1.5×1.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪12 × SFM‬‬ ‫‪12 × 400‬‬

‫= ‪S‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 2445 rev / min‬‬
‫‪π×d‬‬ ‫‪3.14 × .625‬‬
‫‪F = 4 × 0.003 × 2445 = 29 IPM‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(14-3‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ ﻧﻮع اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 400 ft/min‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻮع ‪ HSS‬ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫‪Feed = .003 in per flute‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ وﻗﻄﺮهﺎ ‪ .625‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0003‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X11.0 Y6.0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N20 G00 X.1875 Y-.4 S2445 M03‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G01 Z-.250 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N35 Y1.9 F29.0‬‬
‫‪N40 G00 Z1.0‬‬
‫‪N45 X3.3125‬‬
‫‪N50 G01 Z-.250 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N55 Y-.4 F20.0‬‬
‫‪N60 G28 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N65 G91 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬
‫‪N70 M30‬‬

‫)‪(G03,G02‬‬ ‫_‪<ë†ñ]‚Ö]<DíÒ†£]E<Ù^ÏjÞ÷]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ G17‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G18‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G19‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G02‬ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G03‬ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ‬
‫‪263‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻃﺒ‪‬ﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ R‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ‪ I‬ﻭ‪ J‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(15-4‬‬

‫‪ :P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ :P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ :P‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ :I‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.X‬‬

‫‪ :J‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Y‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺴﻘﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪.I‬‬
‫ﲤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪.J‬‬
‫ﲤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪.K‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (16-4‬ﰎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪264‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ +‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (-‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ‪ I‬ﻭ‪ J‬ﻭ‪ K‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ )‪ ،(+‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )‪.(-‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(16-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(17-4‬‬

‫‪C1‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (17-4‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣ‪ ‬ﺪ ‪‬ﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﱴ ‪ C10‬ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﲑ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ J‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺱ‪:‬‬
‫‪265‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪C1 = G02, I+, J0‬‬

‫‪C2 = G03, I+, J-‬‬
‫‪C3 = G02, I+, J0‬‬
‫‪C4 = G03, I+, J-‬‬
‫‪C5 = G02, I+, J-‬‬
‫‪C6 = G03, I+, J-‬‬
‫‪C7 = G02, I-, J-‬‬
‫‪C8 = G03, I-, J+‬‬
‫‪C9 = G02, I-, J+‬‬
‫‪C10 = G02, I-, J+‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺤﺮآﺔ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻣﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ R‬ﻓﻼ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎرة إذا آﺎن اﻟﻘﻮس‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫أﻗﻞ أو ﻳﺴﺎوي ‪) 180°‬اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻵﻟﺔ هﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ إﻻ إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮهﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺷﺎرة أﺧﺮى( وﺗﻀﺎف اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ R‬إذا آﺎﻧﺖ زاوﻳﺘﻪ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ .180°‬أآﺒﺮ‬
‫زاوﻳﺔ دوران ﻟﻠﻘﻮس ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ هﻲ ‪.359.9°‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ 360°‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ‪ .180°‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ ،360°‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ‪،I‬‬
‫‪ J‬ﻭ‪ K‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ‪ R‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(18-4‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ J ،I‬ﻭ‪ K‬ﻣﻊ ‪ R‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﲡﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪.R‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪ R‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪266‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G00‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G01‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪.G03/G02‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫]‪4<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(19-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0004 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺎدة اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ ﺑﺴﻤﺎآﺔ ‪ .150‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﺸﻮط اﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬

‫اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﻘﻮب اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ذات اﻷﻗﻄﺎر ‪ 0.250‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ وهﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎهﺮة ﻓﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺳﻢ أﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪F = 4 × .002 × 1375 = 11 in/min‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 90 ft/min‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻮع ‪ HSS‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = 0.002‬‬ ‫وﻗﻄﺮهﺎ ‪ 0.250‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
267 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0004
N10 G90 G20 G80 G40
N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0
N20 G90 G00 X-.125 Y-.2 S1375 M03
N25 G43 Z1.0 H02 M08
N30 G01 Z-.16 F50.0
N35 Y2.45 F11.0
N40 G02 X.05 Y2.625 I.175 J0
N45 G01 X3.75
N50 G02 X4.125 Y2.25 I0. J-.375
N55 G01 Y1.05
N60 G02 X3.8 Y.725 I-.325 J0
N65 G01 X3.15
N70 G03 X3.125 Y.7 I0. J-.025
N75 G01 Y.49
N80 G03 X3.140 Y.475 I.015 J0
N85 G01 X3.72
N90 G02 X4.125 Y.07 I0. J-.405
N95 G01 Y-.125
N100 X-.125
N105 G28 Z1. M09
N110 G91 G28 X0 Y0 M05
N115 M30
:R ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
O0004
N10 G90 G20 G80 G40
N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0
N20 G90 G00 X-.125 Y-.2 S1375 M03
N25 G43 Z1.0 H02 M08
N30 G01 Z-.1 F50.0
N35 Y2.45 F11.0
N40 G02 X.05 Y2.625 R.175
N45 G01 X3.75
N50 G02 X4.125 Y2.25 R.375
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪268‬‬

‫‪N55 G01 Y1.05‬‬

‫‪N60 G02 X3.8 Y.725 R.325‬‬
‫‪N65 G01 X3.15‬‬
‫‪N70 G03 X3.125 Y.7 R.025‬‬
‫‪N75 G01 Y.49‬‬
‫‪N80 G03 X3.14 Y.475 R.015‬‬
‫‪N85 G01 X3.72‬‬
‫‪N90 G02 X4.125 Y.07 R.0405‬‬
‫‪N95 G01 Y-.125‬‬
‫‪N100 X-.125‬‬
‫‪N105 G28 Z1. M09‬‬
‫‪N110 G91 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬
‫‪N22 M30‬‬

‫‪G03‬‬ ‫]‪<æ_<G02<Ý]‚~j‰^e<íéfÖç×Ö]<íÒ†£‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ XY‬ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ .Z‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻼ( ﻟﻮﻟﺒﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻼ )ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﻌﹰﺎ ﲣﻠﻖ ﺷﻜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ )ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ( ﻣﻨﻮﻁ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻠﲔ )‪ (20-4‬ﻭ )‪.(21-4‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﻭ‪G02 X…Y…I…J…Z…F… (J‬‬ ‫)ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ …‪ R‬ﺑﺪ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ I‬ﻭ‪G03 X…Y…I…J…Z…F… (J‬‬ ‫)ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ …‪ R‬ﺑﺪ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :X‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Y‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :I‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.X‬‬
‫‪ :J‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Y‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪269‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺭﲟﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻈﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ XY‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﳚﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(20-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(21-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪270‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ F‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.XY‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺷﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﲝﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )ﺑﻨﺎ ًﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺭ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺷﻮﻁ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪G42‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ G02‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .G03‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻳﻠﻐﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (22-4‬ﻣﺜﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(22-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(23-4‬‬
‫‪271‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪5<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ(‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0005 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻮﻻذﻳﺔ ﻧﻮع ‪ CD12L14‬ﺳﻤﺎآﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪12 ×V‬‬ ‫‪12 × 70‬‬
‫= ‪S‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 428‬‬
‫‪π×d‬‬ ‫‪3.14 × .625‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ اﻷﺻﻐﺮي‪ ،‬وﻳُﺤﺘﺎج ﻓﻘﻂ إﻟﻰ دورة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺮار‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬

‫‪SFM = 70 ft/min‬‬ ‫أداة ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺮار ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫‪Feed = 1.5 IPM‬‬ ‫‪ 0.0714‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫)‪((22-4‬‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0005‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N20 G00 X0 Y0 S428 M03‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G01 Z-.575 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N35 G01 X.25 F3.5‬‬
‫‪N40 G03 X.25 Y0 I-.25 Z-.5036 F1.5‬‬
‫‪N45 I-.25 Z-.4322‬‬
‫‪N50 G01 X0 G50.0‬‬
‫‪N55 G00 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N60 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N65 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N70 M30‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪272‬‬

‫ﺣﺴﺒﺖ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ X.25‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻠﻮك ‪ N35‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬

‫‪1.125 0.625‬‬
‫= ‪X‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪= .250‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ ‪ (-.5036) N40‬واﻟﺴﻄﺮ ‪ (-.4322) N45‬ﻳﺴﺎوي‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺗﻘﺪم اﻟﺸﺮار ‪ 0.0714‬أي أن‪:‬‬
‫‪0.5036 - 0.4322 = 0.0714‬‬

‫‪G04‬‬ ‫_‪<DÄŞÎ<áæ‚eE<É]†Ê<î×Â<á]…æ‚Ö]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪G04‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﳛﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫‪Dwell‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ‪.Dwell‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G04‬ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫…‪G04 P‬‬
‫…‪G04 X‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪G04 X1.0 or G04 P1000‬‬
‫‪‬ﺣﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،P‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ )‪ (1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ P‬ﻳﱪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﳌﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺘﺐ ‪ P1000‬ﻷﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ = ‪ 1000‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ P‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻳﻌﺘﱪﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﲔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G04‬ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ P‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻭﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0006 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ ﻧﻮع ‪.4140‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﻚ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﺰﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ اﻷداة رﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪273‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(24-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫ﻗﺪم‪/‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪SFM = 75 ft/min‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .001‬‬ ‫درﺟﺔ ‪ 4‬أو ﻧﻤﺮة ‪4‬‬

‫ﻗﺪم‪/‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪SFM = 75‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮهﺎ‬ ‫‪T02‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = 0.002‬‬ ‫‪ 17/32‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺪم‪/‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪SFM = 75‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HSS‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪T03‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .002‬‬ ‫وﻗﻄﺮ ‪ .750‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0006‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N20 T1 M06‬‬
‫‪N25 G00 X1.25 Y.750 S960 M03 T02‬‬
‫‪N30 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N35 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N40 G01 Z-.269 F1.9‬‬
‫‪N45 G91 G28 Z0 M09‬‬
‫‪N50 M01‬‬
‫‪N55 M06‬‬
‫‪N60 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N65 G00 X1.25 Y.750 S564 M03 T03‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬

‫‪N70 G43 Z1. H02 M08‬‬

‫‪N75 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N80 G01 Z-1.35 F2.25‬‬
‫‪N85 G91 G28 Z0 M09‬‬
‫‪N90 M01‬‬
‫‪N95 M06‬‬
‫‪N100 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N105 G00 X1.25 Y.750 S400 M03 T01‬‬
‫‪N110 G43 Z1. H03 M08‬‬
‫‪N115 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N120 G01 Z-.5 F3.2‬‬
‫‪N125 F04 P300‬‬
‫‪N130 G00 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N135 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N140 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N145 M30‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N125‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟـ ‪ Dwell‬ﻫﻲ ‪ 0.3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻌﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G09‬‬ ‫_‪<Ðé΂Ö]<ÌÎçjÖ]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﲑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G15‬‬ ‫_‪<íéfŞÏÖ]<l^ém]‚uý^e<ØÛÃÖ]<ð^ÇÖc<†Ú‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G16‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﱪﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﰲ ﺳﻄﺮ )ﺑﻠﻮﻙ( ﻟﻮﺣﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G16‬‬ ‫_‪<íéfŞÏÖ]<l^ém]‚uý]<í׶<Ý]‚~j‰]<†Ú‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ )ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ( ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‬
‫)ﺃﻱ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪،G52‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪275‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭ‪‬ﻳﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫]}‪DG19<HG18<HG17E<ëçjŠ¹]<…^éj‬‬
‫‪ :G17‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.XY‬‬
‫‪ :G18‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.XZ‬‬
‫‪ :G19‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.YZ‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻗﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ ،(XY‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪) G17‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰﺀﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ(‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(25-4‬‬

‫‪7<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0007 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬أﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮم ‪.6061-T6‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪276‬‬

‫‪12 ×V‬‬ ‫‪12 × 300‬‬

‫= ‪S‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 4585‬‬
‫‪π×d‬‬ ‫‪3.14 × .250‬‬

‫‪F = 2 × .001 × 4585 = 9.17‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(26-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 300‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻮع ‪ HSS‬ﺑﺒﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = 0.002‬‬ ‫وﻗﻄﺮهﺎ ‪ 0.250‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0007‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G20 G17 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N20 G90 G00 X1.3125 Y.375 S4585 M03‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 Z.2‬‬
‫‪N35 G01 Z-.125 F18.0‬‬
‫‪N40 G18 G03 X.6875 Z-1.25 I-.3125 K0 F9.0‬‬
‫‪277‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N45 G01 Z.2 F18.0‬‬

‫‪N50 G00 Y1.625‬‬
‫‪N55 G01 Z-.125‬‬
‫‪N60 G02 X1.3125 Z-.125 I.3125 K0 F9.0‬‬
‫‪N65 G01 Z.2 F12.0‬‬
‫‪N70 G00 X1.625 Y1.3125‬‬
‫‪N75 G01 Z-.125‬‬
‫‪N80 G19 G02 Y.6875 Z-.125 J-.3125 K0 F9.0‬‬
‫‪N85 G01 Z.2 F18.0‬‬
‫‪N90 G00 X.375‬‬
‫‪N95 G01 Z-.125‬‬
‫‪N100 G03 Y1.3125 Z-.125 J.3125 K0 F9.0‬‬
‫‪N105 G01 Z.2‬‬
‫‪N110 G91 G28 Z0 M09‬‬
‫‪N115 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬
‫‪N120 M30‬‬

‫)‪(G21‬‬ ‫]‪<Ûé×¹^e<Ù^}ý]æ<(G20)<í‘çfÖ^e<Ù^}ý‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﻥ ‪ G20‬ﻭ‪ G21‬ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻄﺒﻘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ G20‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G21‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ ،F‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪Y ،X‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻻ ﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻻ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G22,G23‬‬ ‫‪<ì†Ò]„Ö]<»<íÞˆ~¹]<½çÖ]<æ‚u‬‬
‫ﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G22‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺨﺰ‪‬ﻥ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ G23‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺨﺰ‪‬ﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﺪﺧِﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻨ‪‬ﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻮﺍﻁ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗ‪‬ﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ(‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻁ( ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪278‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(27-4‬‬

‫)‪(G27‬‬ ‫]‪<íéÃq†¹]<íŞÏßÖ]<±c<ìçÃÖ]<àÚ<ÐÏvjÖ‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G27‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎ ﹰﻻ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﹰﺎ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻌﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ )ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﶈﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﻭﻓﻘﻪ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G27‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )ﺃﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G40‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(G42‬ﺳﻴ‪‬ﺤﺪِﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺰﻳﺎﺣﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫)ﺃﻱ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﱵ ﱂ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G28‬‬ ‫]‪<íéÃq†¹]<íŞÏßÖ]<±c<ìçÃÖ‬‬
‫‪Y ،X‬‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﱪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ( ﻣﱪﳎﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Z‬ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (G00‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻵﱄ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗ‪‬ﻀﺎﺀ ﳌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺸﲑﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﳚﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﱪﻫﺎ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28 X0 Y0 Z0‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ )‪(G91‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (G00‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ )‪ (G28‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪279‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(28-4‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G90‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ‬

‫‪G28 Z3.00‬‬
‫‪G28 X6.00 Y7.00‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ Z‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﱪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻮﺩ‪‬ﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :P1‬ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :P2‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :P3‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G29‬‬ ‫]‪<íéÃq†¹]<íŞÏßÖ]<àÚ<ìçÃÖ‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G29‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G30‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳ‪‬ﻄﺒ‪‬ﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ ،(G00‬ﻭﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﱪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(29-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪280‬‬

‫‪ = G91‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻱ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ‬

‫‪G28 X5.0 Y0 P1-P2-P4‬‬
‫‪M06‬‬
‫‪G29 X4.0 Y-1.5 P4-P2-P3‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ = P1‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪ = P2‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪ = P2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ = P3‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ = P4‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G29‬ﺗﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ ‪ P‬ﻭﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪.P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫)‪(G30‬‬ ‫]‪<íÃe]†Ö]æ<HíéÞ^nÖ]<íéÃq†¹]<½^ÏßÖ]<±c<ìçÃÖ‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G28‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﻣﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪G30‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‪) .‬ﺭﲟﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .(G28‬ﻃ‪‬ﺒ ‪‬ﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،G30‬ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ G30‬ﻫﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G28‬ﻭ‪ G29‬ﻭ‪ G30‬ﻟﻠﱪﳎﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻼ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ( ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪DG42<HG41<HG40E<ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<˜èçÃi‬‬
‫‪ :G40‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G41‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G42‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪281‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(30-4‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﱪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﲤﺎﻣﺎﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﳏﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(G40)<ì]ù]<˜èçÃi<ð^ÇÖc‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G40‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .G42‬ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﱪﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻄﻲ )‪ (G01‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ )‪ (G00‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻠﺮﲟﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺲ )ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ( ﻭﺗﻌﻄﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DG41<HG42E<…^ŠéÖ]æ<°ÛéÖ]<àÚ<ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<†ŞÎ<Ì’Þ<˜èçÃi‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G41‬ﻭ‪ G42‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )‪ (G41‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ )‪ (G42‬ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠ‪‬ﻞ ﰲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪.D‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪282‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ )ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ( ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ )ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻋﺘﱪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﺘﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﹰﺍ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﻞ ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ (G42‬ﺃﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.(G41‬‬
‫‪ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<˜èçÃi<‹é‰`i<l]ð]†qc‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﰒ ﺑﺮﻣﺞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ‪ G01G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G42‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y‬ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪.D‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻷﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﰲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ )ﺳﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﹰﺎ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ ،D‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<˜èçÃi<Ý]‚~j‰÷<‚Â]çÎ‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﲞﻄﲔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﲡﻬﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪.G42‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G42‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﻥ ‪ G02‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G03‬ﻣﻔﻌ‪‬ﻠﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ )ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ( ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪283‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (1‬ﻫﻲ ‪.D01‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (2‬ﻫﻲ ‪.D02‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(31-4‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﰲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ .Z‬ﺍﳍﺪﻑ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳍﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0008‬‬
‫‪N1 G90 G17 G20 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N2 G92 X7.0 Y-5.0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N3 G01 G41 X1.00 Y.50 D01 F10.0‬‬
‫‪N4 G01 Y1.5‬‬
‫‪N5 G01 X3.00 Y2.25‬‬
‫‪N6 G02 X5.00 Y2.25 I1.00‬‬
‫‪N7 G03 X5.00 Y1.50 J-.375‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪284‬‬

‫‪N8 G01 X5.00 Y.50‬‬

‫‪N9 X1.00‬‬
‫‪N10 G00 G40 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N11 M05‬‬
‫‪N12 M30‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ أدوات اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G40‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء آﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮف ‪.D‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪G41 D01 G02 X3. Y-3. J-3‬‬

‫‪ :O‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫'‪ :O‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺍﺡ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(32-4‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G41‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G42‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G02‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G03‬ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭﹰﺍ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪놪ÏÖ]<íu]‡ý]<Å^Ã‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﻥ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﳏﻮﺭﻳﻦ( ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ .(G19,G18,G17‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G41‬ﻭ‪ G42‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G40‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫‪285‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﻟﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ α ≤ 180°‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﳌﻐﺎﺩﺭﺗﻪ )‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (B‬ﻟﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ G41‬ﻭ‪ .G42‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﺎﻥ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﳐﺰ‪‬ﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﰲ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪90° ≤ α ≤ 180° :A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(33-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(34-3‬‬

‫‪α < 90°‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(35-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(36-4‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪286‬‬

‫‪90° ≤ α ≤ 180° :B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(37-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(38-4‬‬

‫‪α < 90°‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(39-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(40-4‬‬

‫‪287‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ B‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪:1°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(41-4‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ )‪.(G40‬‬

‫‪α < 90° :A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(42-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(43-4‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪288‬‬

‫‪90° ≤ α ≤ 180°‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(44-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(45-4‬‬

‫‪α < 90° :B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(46-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(47-4‬‬

‫‪289‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪α < 1°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(48-4‬‬

‫‪90° ≤ α ≤ 180°‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(49-4‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻗﻮس‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(50-4‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ G41‬ﻭ‪.G42‬‬
‫‪α < 90°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(51-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬

‫‪α < 1°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(52-4‬‬

‫‪90° ≤ α ≤ 180°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(53-4‬‬

‫‪α > 180°‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(54-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(55-4‬‬
‫‪291‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(56-4‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N1‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻄﺮﺍﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ ) ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SINGLE BLOCK‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪(ON‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻁ ‪ N1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﱪ ﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪N2‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﲢﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ) U1‬ﺳﺘﻨﻐﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ(‪ .‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.U2‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(57-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(58-4‬‬

‫‪9<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0009 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺎﻧﻠﺲ ﺳﺘﻴﻞ ‪ ،303‬ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ أﺑﻌﺎدهﺎ ‪ 3.5×3.5×1.25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SHF = 100, Feed = .002‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ﻧﻤﺮة )‪(o‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪HSS‬‬
‫‪SFM = 100, Feed = .003‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 1.25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب‬
‫‪SFM = 100, Feed = .003‬‬ ‫‪D06 = .650‬‬ ‫ﺳﺖ أﺑﻮاب ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 1.25‬ﻧﻮع ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب‬
‫‪SFM = 100, Feed = .002‬‬ ‫‪D61 = .625‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻮع ‪ HSS‬ﺑﺴﺖ أﺑﻮاب‬ ‫‪T04‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 1.25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
293 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0009
N10 G90 G20 G80 G40 G49
N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0
N20 T01 M06
N25 G00 X1.75 Y1.75 S915 M03 T02
N30 G43 Z.1 H01 M08
N35 G81 G98 Z-.382 R.1 F4.0
N40 G00 G80 Z1.0 M09
N45 G91 G28 Z0
N50 M01
N55 T02 M06
N60 G90 G80 G40 G49
N65 G00 X1.75 Y1.75 S320 M03 T03
N70 G43 Z.1 H02 M08
N75 G83 G98 Z-1.625 R.1 Q.625 F2.0
N80 G00 G80 Z1.0 M09
N85 G91 G28 Z0
N90 M01
N95 T03 M06
N100 G90 G80 G40 G49
N105 G00 X1.75 Y1.75 S320 M03 T04
N110 G43 Z.1 H03 M08
N115 1Z-1.3 F20.0
N120 G01 G42 Y2.750 D60 F5.76
N125 G02 J-1.0
N130 G01 G40 Y1.750 F10.0
N135 G00 Z.1
N140 Y-1.0
N145 G01 Z-.73 F20.0
N150 G42 Y.5 D60
N155 G03 J1.25 G6.0
N160 G01 G40 Y-1.0 F20.0
N165 G00 Z.1 M09
N170 G91 G28 Z0
N175 M01
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪294‬‬

‫‪N180 T04 M06‬‬

‫‪N185 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N190 G00 X1.75 Y1.75 S320 M03 T01‬‬
‫‪N195 G43 Z.1 H04 M08‬‬
‫‪N200 G41 Y2.75 F10. D61‬‬
‫‪N205 G01 Z-1.3 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N210 G03 J-1.0 F3.84‬‬
‫‪N215 G01 G40 Y1.75 F20.0‬‬
‫‪N220 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N225 Y-1.0‬‬
‫‪N230 Z-.75‬‬
‫‪N235 G01 G41 Y0.50 F10. D61‬‬
‫‪N240 G02 J1.25 F4.0‬‬
‫‪N245 G01 G40 Y-1.0 F20.0‬‬
‫‪N250 G00 Z.1 M09‬‬
‫‪N255 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N260 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N265 M30‬‬

‫‪10<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﰲ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﲰﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ‪ 0.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0010 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 300‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ﻧﻤﺮة )‪ (5‬ﻧﻮع ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .003‬‬
‫‪SFM = 300‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 17/32‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .003‬‬
‫‪SFM = 850‬‬ ‫‪D50 = .260‬‬ ‫أداة ﺗﺨﺸﻴﻦ ‪ HSS‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ وﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 1/2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .003‬‬
‫‪SFM = 850‬‬ ‫‪D51 = .250‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HSS‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ وﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 1/2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪T04‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .002‬‬
295 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

(59-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

O0010
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T01 M06
N20 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0
N25 G00 X.750 Y1. S2200 M03 T02
N30 Z.1 H01 M08
N35 G81 G98 Z-.3 R.1 F8.8
N40 G80 Z1.0 M09
N45 G91 G28 Z0
N50 M01
N55 T02 M06
N60 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N65 G00 X.75 Y1.0 S2150 M03 T03
N70 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N75 G81 G98 Z-.70 R.1 F8.0
N80 G80 Z1.0 M09
N85 G91 G28 Z0
N90 M01
N95 T03 M06
N100 G90 G80 G40 G49
N105 G00 X.75 Y1.0 S2200 M03
N110 G43 Z1.0 H03 M08
N115 Z.1
N120 G01 Z-.52 F50.0
N125 G41 Y.71 F4.5 D50
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪296‬‬

‫‪N130 X2.25‬‬
‫‪N135 G03 Y1.29 J.29‬‬
‫‪N140 G01 X.75‬‬
‫‪N145 G03 Y.71 J-.29‬‬
‫‪N150 G01 G40 Y1.0‬‬
‫‪N155 G00 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N160 G91 G28 Z0‬‬
‫‪N165 M01‬‬
‫‪N170 T04 M06‬‬
‫‪N175 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N180 G00 X.75 Y1.0 S2200 M03 T05‬‬
‫‪N185 G43 Z1.0 H04 M08‬‬
‫‪N190 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N195 G01 Z-.52 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N200 G41 Y1.29 F8.8 D51‬‬
‫‪N205 G03 Y.71 J-.29‬‬
‫‪N210 G01 X2.25‬‬
‫‪N215 G03 Y1.29 J.29‬‬
‫‪N220 G01 X.75‬‬
‫‪N225 G40 Y1.0‬‬
‫‪N230 G00 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N235 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N240 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N245 M30‬‬

‫‪DG49<HG44<HG43E<ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<Ùç<˜èçÃi‬‬
‫‪ :G43‬ﻟﻺﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻮن إدﺧﺎل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻷن اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺔ اﻷداة وﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G44‬ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪) .‬ﱂ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤ ﹰ‬
‫‪ :G49‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﻥ ‪ G43‬ﻭ‪ G44‬ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪297‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﲔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ .H‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ )‪ (G43‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‬
‫)‪.(G44‬‬
‫ﳛﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ H‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺘﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪H01 = 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟـ ‪ H‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻐﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻘﺮﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻦ ‪ G43‬ﻭ‪ G44‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.G49‬‬

‫)‪(G10‬‬ ‫‪<ì†^fÚ<sÚ^ÞÖ]<Ðè†<àÂ<íu]‡ý]<íÛéÎ<Ù^}c‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫)‪.(G10‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫…‪G10 P…R‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :P‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﲨﻴﻊ ﲨﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ )‪ (G59 ← G54‬ﳏﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ )‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ (Z‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G10‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺖ ﲨﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫…‪G10 L2 P6 X…Y…Z‬‬

‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ )‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ (Z‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﳍﺎ‬ ‫)‪(G59‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪298‬‬

‫‪G10 L2 P1: G54‬‬

‫‪G10 L2 P2: G55‬‬
‫‪G10 L2 P3: G56‬‬
‫‪G10 L2 P4: G57‬‬
‫‪G10 L2 P5: G58‬‬
‫‪G10 L2 P6: G59‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G10‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻌﻤﻞ وﻷﺟﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻹزاﺣﺎت اﻷﺧﺮى‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫إذا آﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻤﻠﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮراً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻈﺎم اﻹدﺧﺎل‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻠﻮك اﻟﺠﺎري ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ )ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‪ .(G59 ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪G90‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G10‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G10‬اﻟﻤﻨﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ أﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮع وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ واﻟﻤﻌﺪﱠة ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺼﺎﻧﻊ‪.‬‬

‫¶‪DG59<HG58<HG57<HG56<HG55<HG54E<ØÛÃÖ]<l^ém]‚uc<Ø‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪) G92‬ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ( ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ‪ G59‬ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ )ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬إﻟﻰ ‪ G59‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻷن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪G92‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ G54‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ )‪ (G54‬ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ )‪.(G55‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧ‪‬ﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ‪ G59‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧ‪‬ﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﲜﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ 01‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،G54‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫…‪01 G54 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫…‪02 G55 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫…‪03 G56 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫…‪04 G57 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫…‪05 G58 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫…‪06 G59 X…Y…Z‬‬
‫‪299‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(60-4‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ‪ G59‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G92‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ G92‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ‪ YX‬ﺇﱃ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ‪ G59‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻﻥ ﻳﻮﺿﺤﺎﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ‪.G59‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(61-4‬‬

‫‪11<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪0.5‬‬ ‫ﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪HSS‬‬ ‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 80‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 300

:G92 ‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬

O0011
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 G92 X10.0 Y7.0 Z0 (PART A)
N20 G00 X.75 Y.5 S611 M03
N25 G43 Z1.0 M08 H01
N30 G00 Z.1
N35 G01 Z-.65 F3.6
N40 G00 Z.1
N45 X0 Y0
N50 G92 X4.0 Y.75 (PART B)
N55 G00 X.75 Y.5
N60 G01 Z-.65 F3.6
N65 G00 Z.1
N70 X0 Y0
N75 G92 X4.5 Y-1.2 (PARTC)
N80 G00 X.75 Y.75
N85 G01 Z-.65 F3.6
N90 7G00 Z.1
N95 G28 Z1.0 M09
N100 G91 X0 Y0 M05
N105 M30

(62-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

:G59 ‫ ﺇﱃ‬G54 ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

Part No. 1: (A) G54 X-10.0 Y-7.0 Z0
Part No. 2: (B) G55 X-14.0 Y-7.75 Z0
Part N0. 3: (C) G56 X-18.5 Y-6.55 Z0
‫‪301‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪O0011‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G00 G54 X.75 Y.5 S611 M03‬‬
‫‪N20 G43 Z1.0 M08 H01‬‬
‫‪N25 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N30 G01 Z-.65 F3.6‬‬
‫‪N35 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N40 G55 G00 X.75 Y.5‬‬
‫‪N45 G01 Z-.65‬‬
‫‪N50 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N55 G56 G00 X.75 Y.5‬‬
‫‪N60 G01 Z-.65‬‬
‫‪N65 G00 Z.1‬‬
‫‪N70 G28 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N75 G91 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬
‫‪N80 M30‬‬

‫ﲟﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻟﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G92‬ﻭﲨﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪.G59-G54‬‬

‫)‪(G60‬‬ ‫]‪<‚u]æ<å^Ÿ^e<Ä•çjÖ‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G60‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ ﻗﺪ ﺟﻬﺰﺕ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G60‬ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ )ﺍﳋﻠﻮﺹ(‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﻨﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(63-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪302‬‬

‫_‪íÏ×ǹ]<ØéÇjÖ]<l]…æ<†Ú]æ‬‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﳌﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ )‪ (R‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.G98‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺛﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺇﱁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ‪ Dwell‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.G99‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫…‪N…G…G…X…Y…Z…R…Q…P…F…K…L‬‬

‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :N‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪.G99/G98 (R‬‬
‫‪ :X,Y‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﻟـ ‪ R‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺻﺎﳊﺔ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳏﺘﻮﺍﻩ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺛﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Q‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ )ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ( ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ )ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ(‪.‬‬
‫‪303‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪ :F‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪.(IPM‬‬

‫‪ :K‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :L‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ K‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G91‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ L‬ﲤﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ،Y‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ L‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪.(L=1‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ K‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(64-4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ )ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪.(Dwell‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪.(G99) (R‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ‪ Z‬ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪304‬‬

‫)‪(G73‬‬ ‫‪<íéÖ^Â<l^†Šeæ<l]ˆËÏÖ^e<géÏnjÖ]<ì…æ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(65-4‬‬

‫…‪G73 X…Y…Z…R…Q…F‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻖ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Y‬‬ ‫)‪.(1‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪.(R‬‬ ‫)‪.(2‬‬
‫)‪-G01. (9 ،7 ،5 ،3‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺰﺓ ‪ Q‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪-G00 .(8 ،6 ،4‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﳏﺪﺩ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻭﺃﹸﻇﻬِﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ‬
‫»‪.«d‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫)‪.(10‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G99‬‬ ‫)‪.(11‬‬
‫‪ :Q‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻔﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﳊﻈﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﲟﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪ .‬ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧ‪‬ﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ d‬ﰲ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪305‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫)‪(G74‬‬ ‫‪<íè…^ŠéÖ]<í¾ç×ÏÖ]<ì…æ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(66-4‬‬

‫…‪G74 X…Y…Z…R…P…F‬‬

‫ﻳ‪‬ﺪﻭ‪‬ﺭ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M04‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ ‪.S‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﳏﺪﺩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Y‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ Z‬ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪ :P-P.‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﱐ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G98‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪306‬‬

‫)‪(G76‬‬ ‫‪<í΂e<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G76 X…Y…Z…R…Q…P…F‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(67-4‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪ - P.‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﱐ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪.M19‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M19‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M19‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﹰﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Y‬ﲢﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M19‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ )‪.(G76‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺰﻳﺎﺡ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﶈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Y‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(68-4‬‬
‫‪307‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺰﻳﺎﺡ ﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Q‬‬
‫ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧ‪‬ﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Q‬ﰲ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Q‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳ‪‬ﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪-G00 .5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،G99‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G98‬‬
‫‪-G00 .6‬ﺍﻧﺰﻳﺎﺡ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Q‬‬
‫‪-M03 .7‬ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇ‪‬ﺎﺀ ﻭ‪‬ﺪﻑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﺪﻭﺵ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ Q‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G80‬‬ ‫‪<íÏ×ǹ]<géÏnjÖ]<ì…æ<ð^ÇÖc‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺕ ‪ G73‬ﺣﱴ ‪:G89‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﳝﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺎﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ORIGIN‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﲢﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗ‪‬ﻨﻔﱠﺬ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SINGLE BLOCK‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ON‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ( ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ CYCLE START‬ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Feed Hold‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G81‬‬ ‫‪<DìߊÖ]E<ìÿˆÒş †¹]<gÏm<HgéÏnjÖ]<ì…æ‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪ (R‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G99‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(69-4‬‬

‫‪12<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ 0.25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 0.250‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(70-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0012 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ آﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪.1018‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺴﻚ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﺰﻣﺔ واﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ اﻟﻔﻮﻻذ وﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻓﻜﻮك اﻟﻤﻠﺰﻣﺔ )اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬
309 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

(71-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

SFM = 110 HSS (‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة‬ T01
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ 4 ‫ﻧﻤﺮة‬

SFM = 110 0.250 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬HSS ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ‬ T02

Feed = .0035 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0012
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T01 M06
N20 G54 G00 X2.5 Y-1.5 S1408 M03 T02
N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08
N30 G81 G98 Z-.28 R.1 F6.0
N35 G80 Z1. M09
N40 G91 G28 Z0
N45 M01
N50 M06
N55 G90 G80 G40 G49
N60 G00 X2.5 Y-1.5 S160 M03
N65 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N70 G81 G98 Z-.58 R.1 F12.32
N75 G80 Z1. M09
N80 G91 G28 Z0
N85 G28 X0 Y0 M05
N90 M30
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪310‬‬

‫)‪(G82‬‬ ‫‪<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G82‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ )ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﺭ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪.P‬‬
‫…‪G82 X…Y..Z…R…P…F‬‬
‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪.(R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻟﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G99‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫‪13<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﱐ ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(72-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0013 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ آﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪1018‬‬

311 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

.ً‫ﺛﺒﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

SFM = 110 4 ‫ ﻧﻤﺮة‬HSS (‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة‬ T01
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
SFM = 110 .375 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬HSS ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ‬ T02
Feed = .0035 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
SFM = 110 ‫ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬.500 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬HSS ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ‬ T03
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0013
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T1 M06
N25 G54 G00 X2.85 Y-1.3 S1408 M03 T02
N30 G43 Z1. H01 M08
N35 G81 G98 Z-.4 R.1 F5.63
N40 G80 Z1. M09
N45 G91 G28 Z0
N50 M01
N55 M06
N60 G90 G80 G40 G49
N65 G00 X2.85 Y-1.3 S1173 M03 T03
N70 G43 Z1. H02 M08
M75 G81 G98 Z-1.4 F8.21 R.1
N80 G80 Z1. M09
N85 G91 G28 Z0
N90 M01
N95 M06
N100 G90 G80 G40 G49
N105 G00 X2.85 Y-1.3 S880 M03 T01
N110 G43 Z1. H03 M08
N115 G82 G98 Z-1.4 R.1 P200 F7.04
N120 G80 Z1. M09
N125 G91 G28 Z0
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪312‬‬

‫‪N130 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬

‫‪N135 M30‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ وﺣﺪات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪد أﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ P‬ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G82‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬أﻣﺎ إذا أدﺧﻠﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ P‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎهﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎراﻣﺘﺮات اﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(G83‬‬ ‫‪<l]ˆËÏÖ^e<ÐéÛÃÖ]<géÏnjÖ]<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G83 X…Y…Z…R…Q…F‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(73-4‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫)‪.(1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Q‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻔﺰﺓ )ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(2‬‬
‫)‪-G00 .(9 ،6 ،3‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.(G99) R‬‬
‫)‪-G00 .(10 ،7 ،4‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﹸﺛﻘِﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﻩ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﺻﹰﺎ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.d‬‬
‫)‪-G01 .(11 ،8 ،5‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺯﻳﺪ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.d‬‬
‫‪313‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫)‪.(12‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ )‪.(G99) (R‬‬ ‫)‪.(13‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﹰﺍ )ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ( ﻷﻧﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ ،R‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪ .‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻟـ ‪ Z‬ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻳ‪‬ﻤﻜﱢﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ )‪ (G01‬ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (Q) .Q‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .Z‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ d‬ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﰲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪14<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(74-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0014 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ آﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪1018‬‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً‪.‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪314‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 110‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = 0.002‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪5‬‬

‫‪SFM = 110‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪0.421‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = 0.0035‬‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0014‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 T1 M06‬‬
‫‪N20 G54 G00 X2. Y-.1 S1006 M03 T02‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G81 G99 Z-.38 F4.03 R.1‬‬
‫‪N35 G80 Z1. M09‬‬
‫‪N40 G91 G28 Z0‬‬
‫‪N45 M01‬‬
‫‪N50 M06‬‬
‫‪N55 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N60 G54 G00 X2. Y-1. S1045 M03‬‬
‫‪N65 G43 Z1. H02 M08‬‬
‫‪N70 G83 G99 Z-3.15 R.05 Q.45 F7.31‬‬
‫‪N75 G80 Z1. M09‬‬
‫‪N80 G91 G28 Z0‬‬
‫‪N85 G28 X0 Y0 M05‬‬
‫‪N90 M30‬‬

‫ﻳﺪل اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G83‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻠﻮك ‪ N70‬أنﱠ دورة اﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻔﺰات ﻗﺪ ﺑﺪأت‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي ‪ ،R‬ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﻷداة ﺑﻤﻌﺪل ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪ Q.45‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻮد وﺑﺤﺮآﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ إﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ .R‬ﻳﺘﻘﺪم اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ Q‬ﻣﻨﻘﻮﺻﺎً ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ d‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫آﺒﺎراﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻴﺪ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺪورة ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ رﻳﺸﺔ اﻟﺜﻘﺐ إﻟﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ .Z-3.15‬ﺗﺬآﺮ أﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ آﻞ ﺣﺮآﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Q‬ﺗﻌﻮد اﻷداة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮي ‪.R‬‬
‫‪315‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫)‪(G84‬‬ ‫‪<í¾ç×ÏÖ]<ì…æ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(75-4‬‬

‫…‪G84 X…Y…Z…R…P…F‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪) .R‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪-M05‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪-.P‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬

‫‪-M04‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫‪-M05‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫‪-M03‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G98‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬

‫‪15<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(76-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0015 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ آﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ ،1018‬ﺛﺒﺖ اﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 110‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآﺰة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .002‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪4‬‬

‫‪SFM = 110‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪5/16‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .0035‬‬
‫‪SFM = 15‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ ‪3/8-16‬‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
317 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0015
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G45
N15 T1 M6
N20 G00 G54 X1.25 Y-.8 S1045 M03 T02
N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08
N30 G81 G99 Z-.38 R.1 F4.18
N35 G80 Z1. M01
M40 G91 G28 Z0
N45 M01
N50 M06
N55 G80 G40 G49
N60 G54 G00 X1.25 Y-.8 S1408 M03 T03
N65 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N70 G81 G99 Z-.85 R.1 F9.85
N75 G80 Z1. M09
N80 G91 G28 Z0
M85 M01
N90 M06
N55 G80 G40 G49
N60 G54 G00 Z1.25 Y-.8 S152 M03 T01
N65 G43 Z1. H03 M08
N70 G84 G99 Z-1. R.1 F9.5
N75 G80 Z1. M09
N80 G91 G28 Z0 M05
N85 G28 X0 Y0
N90 M30

:‫( آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬F9.5) N70 ‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻠﻮك‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
F = 1/16 × 152 = 9.5
:‫ﺣﻴﺚ أن‬
.‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺗﻘﺪم اﻟﺸﺮار ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‬1/16
.RPM ‫ﻋﺒﱢﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪد اﻟﺪورات ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
ُ ‫ وﻗﺪ‬،‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ دوران ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ‬:152
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪318‬‬

‫‪hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<l]…æ‬‬
‫)‪(G85‬‬ ‫‪<ØÿvŠł ¹Ž ^e<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G85 X…Y…Z…R…F…K‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(77-4‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ ،R‬ﰒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫)‪.(G98‬‬
‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ )‪.(G99‬‬ ‫‪.`3‬‬
‫‪ -M03‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪.(`4, 4‬‬

‫‪G86‬‬ ‫‪<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G86 X…Y…Z…R…F‬‬
‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪ -M05‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪319‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G98‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪ -G00 .`4‬ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G99‬‬

‫‪ -M03‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(78-4‬‬

‫‪16<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(79-4‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0016 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬أﻟﻤﻨﻴﻮم‪ .‬ﺛﺒﱢﺖ اﻟﻤﺎدة آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(80-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(81-4‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(82-4‬‬

‫‪X = .625 - .3 - .05 = .545‬‬

321 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

SFM = 300 HSS (‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآﺰة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة‬ T01
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ 6 ‫ﻧﻤﺮة‬

SFM = 300 1.125 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬HSS ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ‬ T02

Feed = .0035 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
SFM = 800 ‫ﻗﻠﻢ آﺮﺑﻴﺪي ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ اﻟﺜﻘﻮب‬ T03
Feed = .001 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ 1.25 ‫ﻗﻄﺮ‬

SFM = 800 45° ‫أداة آﺴﺮ ﺣﻮاف آﺮﺑﻴﺪﻳﺔ‬ T04

Feed = .001 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
SFM = 800 ‫ﻗﻠﻢ آﺮﺑﻴﺪي ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ اﻟﺜﻘﻮب‬ T05
Feed = .001 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ 1.4 ‫اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
.125 ‫ﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎآﺘﻬﺎ‬

:‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
O0016
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T01 M06
(T01 CENTER DRILL FOR BORES)
N20 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S2291 M03
N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08
N30 S2291 M03
N35 G81 G98 Z-.35 F9.16 R.1
N40 G80 Z1.0 M09
N45 G91 G28 Z0
N50 M01
N55 T02 M06
(T02 DRILL 1.125 DIAMETER FOR BORES)
N60 G90 G80 G40 G49
N65 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S1182 M03 T03
N70 G43 Z1.0 H02 M08
N75 G73 G98 Q.3 Z-2.0 F8.27 R.1
N80 G80 Z1.0 M09
N85 G91 G28 Z0
N90 M01
N95 T03 M06
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 322

(T03 BORE 1.25 DIAMETER HOLE THROUGH)

N100 G90 G80 G40 G49
N105 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S2444 M03 T04
N110 G43 Z1.0 H03 M08
N115 G86 G98 Z-1.65 F2.44 R.1
N120 G80 Z5. M09
N125 G91 G28 Z0
N130 M01
N135 T04 M06
(T04 CHAMFER 45° X.02 ON 1.25 DIAMETER HOLE)
N140 G90 G80 G40 G49
N145 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S3086 M03 T05
N150 G43 Z1. H04 M08
N155 S3086 M03
N160 G01 Z-.05 F50.0
N165 X.545 F3.08
N170 G03 I-.545
N175 G01 X0
N180 G00 Z1.0 M09
N185 G91 G28 Z0
N190 M01
N195 T05 M06
(T05 BACK BORE 1.400 DIAMETER UNDERCUT)
N200 G90 G80 G40 G49
N205 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S2182 M03
N210 G43 Z1.0 H05 M08
N215 S2182 M03
N220 G01 Z-.425 F50.0
N225 G91 G41 Y.7 F6.5 D50
(D50 = .500)
N230 G03 J-.7 F2.18
N235 M98 P0002 L14
N240 G01 G40 Y-.7 F50.0
N245 G90 G00 Z5. M09
N250 G91 G28 Z0 M05
N255 G28 X0 Y0
N260 M30
‫‪323‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪ /14/‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺣﱴ ﰎ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻊ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﻰ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ‪.G87‬‬

‫‪êñˆ¢]<sÚ^ÞÖ]<“Þ‬‬
‫‪O0002‬‬
‫‪N10 G01 Z-.1 F2.0‬‬
‫‪N15 G03 J-.7 F3.0‬‬
‫‪N20 M99‬‬

‫‪G87‬‬ ‫‪<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G87‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ )ﺍﻷﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻪ )ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫…‪G87 X…Y…Z…R…Q…P…F‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(83-4‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﲔ ﻭﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪.Q‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ‪-M19‬ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ )ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.(G76‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.(Z‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Q‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬

‫‪ -M03‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪324‬‬

‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺍﳌﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﱪﻣﺞ ‪-M19‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪.Q‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬

‫‪ -G00 .10‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪ -M03 .11‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪G88‬‬ ‫‪<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G88 X…Y…Z…R…P…F…K‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(84-4‬‬

‫‪-G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪-G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪-G04‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ ‪ .P‬ﻣﻊ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪-M05‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫)‪ .(`5, 5‬ﺳﺤﺐ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪325‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺳﻚ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -P‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﱐ‪.‬‬

‫‪G89‬‬ ‫‪<hçÏnÖ]<Äé‰çi<ì…æ‬‬
‫…‪G89 X…Y…Z…R…P…F‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(85-4‬‬

‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬

‫‪ -G01‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪ -G04‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫)‪ -G01 .(`4, 4‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ‪.R‬‬
‫‪ -G00‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.G98‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫_‪<í¥¹]<l÷û]<î×Â<í×nÚ‬‬
‫‪D^ğ éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†ÚE‬‬
‫)‪(G91‬‬ ‫]‪<íè‚è]ˆjÖ]<l^ém]‚uý]æ<G90<íÏת¹]<l^ém]‚uý^e<í¥Ö]<°e<íÞ…^Ϲ‬‬
‫ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪326‬‬

‫‪17<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(86-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0017 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‪.‬‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪاد‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ‬

‫ﺗﺮآﺐ اﻷداة ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 70‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮهﺎ‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .0035‬‬ ‫‪1/4‬‬
‫‪327‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫)‪(G92‬‬ ‫]}‪<l^ém]‚uý]<í׶<…^éj‬‬
‫)‪G92 X(A) Y(B‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻭﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻳ‪‬ﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(87-4‬‬

‫‪O0017‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X10.0 Y-7.0 Z0 S1070 M03‬‬
‫‪N20 G00 X.4 Y.5‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G81 G98 Z-.5 F7.48 R.1‬‬
‫‪N35 X1.3 Z-.6 R-.15‬‬
‫‪N40 X2.1 Z-.75 R.35‬‬
‫‪N45 X3.25 Z-.45 R.85‬‬
‫‪N50 G80 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N55 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N60 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N65 M30‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪328‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0017‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 G92 X10.0 Y-7.0 Z0 S1070 M03‬‬
‫‪N20 X.4 Y.5‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G91 G81 G98 Z-.6 F6.4 R-.9‬‬
‫‪N35 Z-.45 R-1.15‬‬
‫‪N40 X.9 Z-1.1 R-.65‬‬
‫‪N45 X.8 Z-1.3 R-.15‬‬
‫‪N50 G80 X1.15 Z5.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N55 G28 Z0 M05‬‬
‫‪N60 G28 Y0‬‬
‫‪N65 X0‬‬
‫‪N70 M30‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪد اﻹﺷﺎرة )‪ +‬أو ‪ (-‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﺤﻮر ﺟﻤﻠﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G90‬أو ‪ G91‬ﻳﺠﺐ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻘﻴﺎن ﺻﺎﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮهﻤﺎ ﺑﺄواﻣﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ‪ G90‬أو ‪.G91‬‬

‫‪D1<ÜÎ…<Ù^nÚE<‚ÏÃÚ<sÚ^Þ†e‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(88-4‬‬
‫‪329‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺨﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(89-4‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺠﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺸﻐ‪‬ﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﱵ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻓﺘـﺢ ﺍﻟﺜﻘـﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺭ ‪ ،.052‬ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ ﺳﻴﻔﺮ‪‬ﺯ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﻐـﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﲰﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﱪﻧـﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﱵ ﺗﺸﻐﻴـﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻔﺖ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺻﺤﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴـﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،O0018‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪.O0019‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ O0018 :‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ X :G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫‪ X :G55‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ Y ،CL‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ Z ،CL‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﺑﺮوﻧﺰ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪H01‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪0‬‬
‫‪H02‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪3/64‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫‪H03‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺤﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪0.052‬‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪330‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،O0019 :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪2‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ X :G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫‪ X :G55‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ Y ،CL‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ Z ،CL‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﺑﺮوﻧﺰ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 70‬‬ ‫‪H04‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺧﺸﻦ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪T04‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .002‬‬ ‫‪.125‬‬

‫‪SFM = 70‬‬ ‫‪H05‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ إﻧﻬﺎء‪-‬أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب‬ ‫‪T05‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .002‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪-HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.0781‬‬

‫‪l^jfn¹]<– ‬‬
‫ﺟﻬ‪‬ﺰ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐ‪‬ﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴـﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘـﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪2.5×12.0×.50‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(90-4‬‬

‫ﻍ‪ .‬ﻳﻔ ‪‬ﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﺍ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ )ﺃﺻﺒﻊ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ( ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺸﻐﻞ ﻻﺣﻘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺘﱪ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳚﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ ،.528‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ .0.100‬ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺛﻘﱢﺐ ﰒ ﻗﻠﻮِﻅ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﺪ ﰎ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺘﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪331‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪D1<Ù^nÚE<‚Ïù]<sÚ^ÞÖ]<l]]‚Âc<Ì‘æ‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳ‪‬ﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪ .X‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﻛﻤﱪﺍﺗﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﱂ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﰒ ﳚﺮﻱ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ G54‬ﻭ‪.G55‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(91-4‬‬

‫‪ØÛÃÖ]<l^u]‡c<Œ^éÎ<l]ð]†qc‬‬
‫ﱠﰎ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﰎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ )‪ .(Fanuc 16-18‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻧﻊ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺻﻔﱢﺮ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐـﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟـﺰﺭ ‪) POSTION‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪،(POS‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪"ABS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POSITION‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ Y ،X‬ﻭ‪ .Z‬ﺗ‪‬ﻈﻬِﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺿﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺩﻗﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﰒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(X, Y ORIGIN) ORIGIN‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﻛﺐ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﹰ ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HANDLE‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪332‬‬

‫ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺣﱴ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ .(91-4‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﻭﺀﺓ ﻟـ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧﻞ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ )‪ (Offset‬ﻣﻦ ﲨﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 01‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G54‬ﻳ‪‬ﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗ‪‬ﺪﺧ‪‬ﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗ‪‬ﻘﺮﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ‪G55‬؛ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 02‬ﰲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﻊ ﺑﻮﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻭﻧﺰ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﹸﻋﺪ‪‬ﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎﹰ ﰲ ﻛﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÄŞÏÖ]<l]æ_<Ùç<l^u]‡c<Œ^éÎ<l]ð]†qc‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺳﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﰲ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MDI‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ،T01 M06‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT‬ﰒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CYCLE START‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻏﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .HANDLE‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OFFSET/SETTING‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻲ ‪ OFFSET‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻀﺎ ًﺀ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪ .Z‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Y ،X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Z‬ﰲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ORIGIN‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﲑﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺣﺮ‪‬ﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﻴﺚ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﺃﺳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﺎﺕ )‪ (Handle‬ﻭﲝﺬﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﳝﺲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﹰﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺳﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 01‬ﺃﻱ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(T01‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺮ‪‬ﻙ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﳋﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﲢﺲ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰒ ﺃﻧﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﲰﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪333‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﳌﺎ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Z‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Z‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻤﻌﲎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﲤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻲ ‪ INP.C.‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺇﱃ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗ‪‬ﺪﻭ‪‬ﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (Cursor‬ﻳﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .INPUT‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Z‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﶈﺠﻮﺯ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ‪ 01‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﻳﺘ‪‬ﺒﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺤﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗ‪‬ﺰﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻦ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﱪﺝ(‪ .‬ﺗ‪‬ﺼﻔﱠﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪:‬‬
‫‪19<ÜÎ…æ<18<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<“Þ‬‬

‫‪O0018‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 T01 M06‬‬
‫‪N20 G54 G00 X0 Y.1787 S4000 M03 T02‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G81 G98 Z-.06 R.05 F4.0‬‬
‫‪N35 M98 P2‬‬
‫‪N40 G90 G00 G55 X0 Y.1787‬‬
‫‪N45 G81 G98 Z-.055 R.05 F4.0‬‬
‫‪N50 M98 P2‬‬
‫‪N55 G90 G00 G80 Z5. M09‬‬
‫‪N60 G91 G28 Z0‬‬
‫‪N65 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N70 M01‬‬
‫‪N75 T02 M06‬‬
‫‪N80 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 334

N85 G00 G54 X0 Y.1787 S4000 M03 T03

N90 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N95 G83 G98 Z-.35 R.05 Q.05 F4.0
N100 M98 P2
N105 G90 G00 G55 X0 Y.1787
N110 G83 G98 Z-.35 R.05 Q.05 F4.0
N115 M98 P2
N120 G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
N125 G91 G28 Z0
N130 G28 X0 Y0
N135 M01
N140 T03 M06
N145 G90 G80 G40 G49
N150 G54 G00 X0 Y.1787 S4000 M03
N155 G43 Z1. H03 M08
N160 G85 G98 Z-.31 R.05 F6.0
N165 M98 P2
N170 G80 G90 G00 G55 X0 Y.1787
N175 G85 G98 Z-.31 R.05 F6.0
N180 M98 P2
N185 G80 G00 Z1.0 M09
N190 G91 G28 Z0
N195 G28 X0 Y0
N200 M05
N205 M30
:‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬
O0002
N2 X-.1679 Y.0611
N3 X-.1718 Y-.0493
N4 X1. Y.1787
N5 X.8321 Y.0611
N6 X.8282 Y-.0493
N7 X.2 Y01787
N8 X1.8321 Y.0611
N9 X1.8282 Y-.0493
N10 X3.0 Y.1787
335 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N11 X2.8321 Y.0611

N12 X2.8282 Y-.0493
N13 X4.0 Y.1787
N14 X3.8321 Y.0611
N15 X3.8382 Y-.0493
N16 X5.0 Y.1787
N17 X4.8321 Y.0611
N18 X4.8282 Y-.0493
N19 X6.0 Y.1787
N20 X5.8321 Y.0611
N21 X5.8282 Y-.0493
N22 X7.0 Y.1787
N23 X6.8321 Y.0611
N24 X6.8321 Y-.0493
N25 X8.0 Y.1787
N26 X7.8321 Y.0611
N27 X7.8282 Y-.0493
N28 X9.0 Y.1787
N29 X8.8321 Y.0611
N30 X8.8282 Y-.0493
N31 M99
:(2) ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
O0019
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T04 M06
N20 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S3000 M03 T05
N25 G43 Z1. H04 M08
N30 M98 P6 L10
N35 G90 G00 G55 X0 Y0
N40 M98 P6 L10
N45 G00 G90 Z1.0 M09
N50 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0
N55 M01
N60 T05 M06
N65 G90 G80 G40 G49
N70 G00 G54 X0 Y0 S2300 M03 T04
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 336

N75 G43 Z1. H05 M08

N80 M98 P7 L10
N85 G00 G90 G55 X0 Y0
N90 M98 P7 L10
N95 G00 G90 Z1.0 M09
N100 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0
N105 M01
N110 M30
:(2) ‫ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
O0006
N1 G90 G00 Z0
N2 G91 G01 Z-.182 F4.0
N3 G42 X-.1225 D01
N4 G02 X.0138 Y.0564 I.1225
N5 G01 X.0412 Y-.0369
N6 G02 X.088 Y.0393 I.0615 J-.0195
N7 G01 Y.0608
N8 G02 X.1352 Y-.0632 I-.0265 J-.0195
N9 G01 Z.05
N10 G02 X.1352 Y.0632 I.1087 J-.1196
N11 G0 G40 X-.0265 Y-.1196
N12 G90 G00 Z1.0
N13 G91 X1.0
N14 M99
:(2) ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
O0007
N1 G90 G00 Z0
N2 G91 G01 Z-.184 F2.0
N3 G01 G42 X-.151 D02
N4 G02 X.0358 Y.0976 I.151 F.3
N5 G01 X.0458 Y-.0357 F1.0
N6 G02 X.0674 Y.0311 I.0694 J-.0619 F2.0
N7 G01 Y.058 F.5
N8 G02 X-.1132 Y-.0534 I.002 J-.151 F2.0
N9 G01 Z.05 F10.0
‫‪337‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N10 G02 X.1132 Y.0534 I.1152 J-.0976 F2.0‬‬

‫‪N11 G01 G40 X.002 Y-.151‬‬
‫‪N12 G90 G00 Z1.0‬‬
‫‪N13 G91 X1.0‬‬
‫‪N14 M99‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪:(18‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪:‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬

‫‪G90‬‬ ‫ﳝﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪ G40 ،G20 ،G80 ،G90‬ﻭ‪ ،G49‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ G80 ،‬ﺃﹸﺩﺧِﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻟﻐﻴﺖ‪ G20 .‬ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻮﺻﺔ‪ G40 .‬ﻳﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ G49‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪N15 T01 M06‬‬

‫ﰎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T01‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺭ‪‬ﻛﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N20 G54 G00 X0. Y.1787 S4000 M03 T02‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ (G54‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﲔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪-‬ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪) Y‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ X0‬ﻭ‪ .(Y.1787‬ﳛﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺁﻻﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ (S4000) RPM‬ﻭﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(M03‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (T02‬ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿـﻊ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳـﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ )‪ (G43‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑـ ‪،H01‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ )‪ (1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ M08‬ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪338‬‬

‫‪N30 G81 G98 Z-.06 R.05 F4.0‬‬

‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﺍﻥ ‪ G81‬ﻭ‪ G98‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺣﱴ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪.-.06‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ ‪ R‬ﻭﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.05‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ‪ Z-.06‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ‪ F4.‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﳛﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪ (G00‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N25‬ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻫﻲ ‪.Z1.‬‬
‫‪N40 M98 P2‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪ O0002‬ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺣﱴ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪O0002‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ ،O0018‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪N2 X-0.1679 Y0.0611‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻨﺠﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬
‫‪N3 X-0.1718 Y-0.0493‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.1‬‬

‫‪N4 X1.0 Y0.1787‬‬

‫‪X1.0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ (X‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N30‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ )ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪N31 M99‬‬

‫‪O0018‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N31‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M99‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪.N40‬‬
‫‪339‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ O0018‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N40‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G55‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N45‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N50‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M98‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪ O0002‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﱃ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺷﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ .(88-4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N55‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،M09‬ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﳌﺮ ﹶﻛﺰ‪‬ﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺘﺮﺓ( ﺇﱃ ‪ Z1.0‬ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ Z‬ﻭﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N60‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪G28‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ .Z‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N65‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M01‬ﺍﳌﻜﺘﻮﺏ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N70‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OPTIONAL STOP‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪ .ON‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N75‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (T02‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪.M06‬‬
‫‪N80 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪N85 G80 G54 X0 Y.1787 S4000 M03 T03‬‬

‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺇﱃ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪ (G00‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪ X0‬ﻭ‪.Y.1787‬‬

‫‪N90 G43 Z1. H02 M08‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .T02‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻠﻮ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ )‪ (1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .M08‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N90‬ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N25‬ﻭﳜﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ‪.T02‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫‪N200‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪ N135‬ﻭ‪N140‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪N75‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪N75‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪N15‬‬ ‫ﲟﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪340‬‬

‫‪N15-N75‬‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬

‫‪N75-N135‬‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪N140-N200‬‬ ‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N205‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M30‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ 205‬ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.CYCLE START‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﺸﺮﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪íéÞ^nÖ]<íé×ÛÃÖ‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﳌﺜﻘﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻳﺸﱵ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺠﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺸﻦ ﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ،.125‬ﻭﺗﻨﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺷﻮﻁ ﺍﻹ‪‬ﺎﺀ ﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 5/64‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿـﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﰲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺸﺒـﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔـﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺜـﺎﱐ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻜـﻞ ﻛﺮﺳﻲ ﻭﺗﺪﹰﺍ ﺑﻘﻄـﺮ ‪ 0.0515‬ﺣﺸـﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺪﺧـﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺤﻮﻝ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺵ ﺗﻮﺿﻌﹰﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﺐ ﻭﳝﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪O0019<ÜÎ…<êŠéñ†Ö]<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﲣﺺ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪) (19‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ ((2‬ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ T04‬ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (7‬ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪.T05‬‬

‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N10‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.O0018‬‬

‫‪N15 T04 M06‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T04‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﰲ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪) ،M06‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪.(T03‬‬

‫‪N20 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S3000 M03 T05‬‬

‫‪341‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻳ‪‬ﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G54‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (M03‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ S3000‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T05‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪N25 G43 Z1. H04 M08‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ‪ T04‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻠﻮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ ،(Z1.0‬ﻳﺘﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ )‪.(M08‬‬

‫‪N30 M98 P6 L10‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (6‬ﻭﻳﻨﻔﺬ ‪ 9‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ )ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮ(‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻳ‪‬ﺘﺤﻜﱠﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﲦﺎﱐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﳑﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (92-4‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(92-4‬‬

‫ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬

‫‪P0: X0, Y0‬‬ ‫‪P1: X - .1255, Y0‬‬ ‫‪P2: X - .1087, Y + .0564‬‬
‫‪P3: X - .0615, Y + .0195‬‬ ‫‪P4: X + .0265, Y + .0588‬‬ ‫‪P5: X + .0265, Y + .1196‬‬
‫‪P6: X - .1087, Y + .0564‬‬ ‫‪P7: X + .0265, Y + .1169‬‬ ‫‪P8: X0, Y0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪O006‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ ،O0019‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪.(2‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪342‬‬

‫]‪O0006<êñˆ¢]<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬

‫‪N1 G90 G00 Z0‬‬

‫ﻳﺸﲑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﱃ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪.0‬‬

‫‪N2 G91 G01 Z-.182 F4‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ Z-.182‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ )‪ (4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N3 G01 G42 X-.1255 D01‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،X-.1552‬ﻭﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ )‪ (D01‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ‪) .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﳏﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎ ٍﻭ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ(‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﲰﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 0.005‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹ‪‬ﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ T05‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﻮﻁ ﺍﻹ‪‬ﺎﺀ‪.‬‬

‫‪N4 G02 X.0138 Y.0564 I.1125‬‬

‫‪I.1225‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪N5 G01 X.0412 Y-.0369‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳏﺪﺩ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪) .Y‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(P‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪N6 G02 X.088 Y.0393 I.0615 J-0.0195‬‬

‫‪ X‬ﻭ‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ .(P‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ I‬ﻭ‪ J‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﻭﻓﻖ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬

‫‪N7 G01 Y.0608‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪) .Y‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(P‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪343‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N8 G02 X-.1352 Y-.0632 I-.0265 J-.0195‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪N9 G01 Z.050‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ 0.05‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.Z‬‬

‫‪N10 G02 X.1352 Y.0632 I.1087 J-.1196‬‬

‫ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪N11 G01 G40 X-.0265 Y-.1196‬‬

‫ﺃﻟﻐﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G42‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،G40‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪N12 G90 G00 Z1.0‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N13 G91 X1.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N14 M99‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ .O0019‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M98 L10‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (6‬ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫‪ N35‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪N35 G90 G00 G55 X0 Y0‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ G55‬ﻭﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ .Y‬ﻳﺸﲑ ‪ G00‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪344‬‬

‫‪N40 M98 P6 L10‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (6‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N45‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪N45 G00 G90 Z1.0M09‬‬

‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Z1.0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪N50 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N55 M01‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪.(ON‬‬ ‫‪OPTIONAL STOP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪N60 T05 M06‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T04‬ﺇﱃ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T05‬ﻋﻮﺿﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﳏﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪N65 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪N70 G00 G54 X0 Y0 S2300 M03 T04‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪ S2300‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪ T04‬ﲡﻬﺰ‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪N75 G43 Z1. H05 M08‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﻘﺮﺅﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .G43‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ M08‬ﻳ‪‬ﻔﻌ‪‬ﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪345‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N80 M98 P7 L10‬‬

‫ﰎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (7‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫‪P0: X0, Y0‬‬ ‫‪P1: X - .151, Y0‬‬ ‫‪P2: X - .1152, Y + .0976‬‬
‫‪P3: X - .0694, Y + .0619‬‬ ‫‪P4: X - .002, Y - .093‬‬ ‫‪P5: X - .002, Y + .151‬‬
‫‪P6: X - .1152, Y + .0976‬‬ ‫‪P7: X - .002, Y + .151‬‬ ‫‪P8: X0, Y0‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ‬ ‫‪P8‬‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ ‫‪P0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﻋﱪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ‪.O0007‬‬
‫‪N1 G90 G00 Z0‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﺮﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺇﱃ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲨﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪N2 G91 G01 Z-.184 F2.0‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﲟﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪N3 G01 G42 X-.151 D02‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪) X-.151‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(P‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪N4 G02 X.0358 Y.0976 I.151 F3.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪N5 G01 X.0458 Y-.0357 F1.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪N6 G02 X.0674 Y.0311 I.0694 J-.0619 F2.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲟﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪N7 G01 Y.058 F5.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪346‬‬

‫‪N8 G02 X-.1132 Y-.0534 I.002 J-.151 F2.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲟﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭﺑﺎﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.P‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪N9 G01 Z.05 F10.0‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0.05‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N10 G02 X.1132 Y.0534 I.1152 J-.0976 F2.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 7‬ﲟﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N11 G01 G40 X.002 Y-.151‬‬

‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲟﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ P‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪N12 G90 G00 Z1.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻠﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N13 G91 G00 X1.0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ‪) X1.0‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪N14 M99‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .7‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .M98 P7 L10‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N85‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪N85 G00 G90 G55 X0 Y0‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪N90 M98 P7 L10‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (7‬ﻭﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ‪ N95‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪347‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N95 G00 G90 Z1.0 M09‬‬

‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻠﻮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﲟﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﲝﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﱪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪N100 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪N105 M01‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ )ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ OPTIONAL STOP‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ‪.(ON‬‬

‫‪N110 M30‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ .(19‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻭﳚﺮﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ CYCLE START‬ﻓﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪†¾^ßjÖ]<íÏè†<ÐéfŞi<x•çè<Ù^nÚ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(93-4‬‬

‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺷﺮﺡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﱢﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﳚﺎﺩ ﻧﻈﲑﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Y‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺼﲑ ﻭﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 348

X ‫ = ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬M21

Y ‫ = ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬M22
‫ = ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬M23
20<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ

O0020
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49 M23
N15 G00 G90 G54 X-1.25 Y.75 S1000 M03
N20 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08
N25 G81 G98 Z-.35 R.1 F6.0
N30 M98 P2
N35 G00 G80 X0
N40 M21
N45 G00 X-1.25 Y.75
N50 G81 G98 Z-.35 F6. R.1
N55 P2 M98
N60 G00 G80 X0 Y0
N65 M23
N70 M22
N75 G00 X-1.25 Y.75
N80 G81 G98 Z-.35 F6. R.1
N85 M98 P2
N90 G80 G00 X0 Y0
N95 M21
N100 G00 X-1.25 Y.75
N105 G81 G98 Z-.35 F6. R.1
N110 M98 P2
N115 G80 Z1.0 M09
N120 M23
N125 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0
N130 M30

20<ÜÎ…<Ù^nÛ×Ö<êñˆq<sÚ^Þ†e

O0002
N1 X-2.5
‫‪349‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N2 X-3.75‬‬
‫‪N3 Y1.5‬‬
‫‪N4 X2.5‬‬
‫‪N5 X1.25‬‬
‫‪N6 Y2.25‬‬
‫‪N7 X-2.5‬‬
‫‪N8 X-3.75‬‬
‫‪N9 M99‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪:X‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(94-4‬‬

‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﹰﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺷﻜﺎ ٍﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰒ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻮﻇﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻭﻅ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0021 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ :Y ،G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ‬

‫رآﱢﺐ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮف ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺴﱢﻢ أو ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮف ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻮر اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ‪.‬‬

Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 350

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ أداة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

SFM = 96 (‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة‬ T01
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ 3 ‫ ﻧﻤﺮة‬HSS

SFM = 95 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬HSS ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ‬ T02

Feed = 0.0035 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ .3125

SFM = 15 3/8-16 ‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ‬ T03

SFM = 95 ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺄرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب‬ T04
Feed = .002 ‫ﺑﺎب‬/‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ .250 ‫ ﻗﻄﺮ‬- HSS ‫ﻧﻮع‬

21 ‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬

O0021
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 T01 M06
N20 G00 G54 X-.75 Y0 A0 S1520 M03
N25 G43 Z1. H01 M08
N30 G98 G81 Z-.375 R.1 F6.0
N35 M98 P2
N40 G80 Z1.0 M09
N45 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0
N50 M01
N55 T02 M06
N60 G90 G80 G40 G49
N65 G54 G00 X-.75 Y0 A0 S1152 M03
N70 G43 Z1. H02 M08
N75 G98 G81 Z-.450 R.1 F8.0
N80 M98 P2
N85 G80 Z1.0 M09
N90 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0
N95 M01
N100 T03 M06
N105 G90 G80 G40 G49
N110 G00 G54 X-.75 S120 M03
N115 G43 Z1. H03 M08
N120 G98 G84 Z-.55 R.2 F7.5
‫‪351‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪N125 M98 P2‬‬

‫‪N130 G80 Z5. M09‬‬
‫‪N135 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0‬‬
‫‪N140 M01‬‬
‫‪N145 T04 M06‬‬
‫‪N150 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N155 G54 G00 X-3.3 Y0 A0‬‬
‫‪N160 G43 Z1. H04 M08‬‬
‫‪N165 S1520 M03‬‬
‫‪N170 G01 Z-.15 F50.0‬‬
‫‪N175 X-1.875 F6.0‬‬
‫‪N180 A360. F200.0‬‬
‫‪N185 G00 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N190 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 A0‬‬
‫‪N200 M30‬‬

‫‪21<ÜÎ…<sÚ^Þ×Ö<êñˆq<sÚ^Þ†e‬‬

‫‪O0002‬‬
‫‪N1 A90‬‬
‫‪N2 A180‬‬
‫‪N3 A270‬‬
‫‪N4 M99‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛـﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨـﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺧـﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺮ‪‬ﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪êÏÊ_<ØéÇi<ˆÒ†Ú<í¥†e<î×Â<Ù^nÚ‬‬
‫ﰎ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺑﺮﳎﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﰎ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ‪ .‬ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺴ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪352‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(95-4‬‬

‫‪22<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 14×8 :‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺛﻘﺒﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﳍﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 0.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺫﻱ ﻭﺗﺪﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺒﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻳﺘﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ ‪ 1.5‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﳏﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻳﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0022 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Y ،G54‬اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪3‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.125‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫‪353‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺄرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫‪ - HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪1.0‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ )‪(.4219‬‬ ‫‪T04‬‬
‫‪27/64‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ ‪1/2 - 13 UNC‬‬ ‫‪T05‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ )‪(.2344‬‬ ‫‪T06‬‬
‫‪15/64‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺄرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب‬ ‫‪T07‬‬
‫‪ HSS -‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.240‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻞ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.250‬‬ ‫‪T08‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺛﻘﻮب ﻗﻄﺮ ‪2.00‬‬ ‫‪T09‬‬
‫أداة آﺴﺮ ﺣﻮاف زاوﻳﺔ ̊‪45‬‬ ‫‪T10‬‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0022‬‬
‫‪N1 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17‬‬
‫‪N2 M11 T01‬‬
‫‪N3 M06‬‬
‫‪N4 G90 G00 G54 x0 Y4.0 B0 S600 M03‬‬
‫‪N5 M10‬‬
‫‪N6 G43 Z8.5 M08 H01‬‬
‫‪N7 P0002 L6 M98‬‬
‫‪N8 G80 Z10.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N9 M11‬‬
‫‪N10 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0‬‬
‫‪N11 M01‬‬
‫‪N12 T02‬‬
‫‪N13 M06‬‬
‫‪N14 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17‬‬
‫‪N15 G0 G54 X0 Y4.0 B0 S244 M03‬‬
‫‪N16 M10‬‬
‫‪N17 G43 Z8.5 M08 H02‬‬
‫‪N18 P0004 L6 M98‬‬
‫‪N19 G80 Z10.0 M09‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 354

N20 M11
N21 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N22 M01
N23 T03
N24 M06
N25 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N26 G00 G54 X0 Y4.0 B0 S305 M03
N27 M10
N28 G43 Z8.5 M08 H03
N29 P0005 L6 M98
N30 G80 Z10.0 M09
N31 M11
N32 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N33 M01
N34 T04
N35 M06
N36 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N37 G00 G54 X-3.0 Y6.75 B0 S726
N38 M10
N39 G43 Z8.5 M08 H04
N40 P0006 L6 M98
N41 G80 Z10.0 M09
N42 M11
N43 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N44 M01
N45 T05
N46 M06
N47 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N48 G00 G54 X-.30 Y6.75 B0 S100 M03
N49 M10
N50 G43 Z8.5 M08 H05
N51 P0007 L6 M98
N52 G80 Z10.0 M09
N53 M11
N54 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N55 M01
N56 T06
355 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N57 M06
N58 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N59 G00 G54 X3.0 Y4.0 B0 S1300 M03
N60 M10
N61 G43 Z8.5 M08 H06
N62 P0008 L6 M98
N63 G80 Z10.0 M09
N64 M11
N65 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N66 M01
N67 T07
N68 M06
N70 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N71 G00 G54 X-3.0 Y4.0 B0 S1200 M03
N72 M10
N73 G43 Z8.5 M08 H07
N74 P0009 L6 M98
N75 180 Z10.0 M09
N76 M11
N77 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N78 M01
N79 T08
N80 M06
N81 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N82 G00 G54 X-3.0 Y4.0 B0 S800 M03
N83 M10
N84 G43 Z8.5 M08 H08
N85 P0010 L6 M98
N86 G80 Z10.0 M09
N87 M11
N88 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0
N89 M01
N90 T09
N91 M06
N92 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17
N93 G00 G54 X0 Y4.0 B0 S500 M03
N94 G43 Z8.5 M08 H09
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪356‬‬

‫‪N95 G76 G98 Q.01 Z6.0 F2.0 R7.2‬‬

‫‪N96 B60‬‬
‫‪N97 B120‬‬
‫‪N98 B180‬‬
‫‪N99 B240‬‬
‫‪N100 B300‬‬
‫‪N101 G80 Z10.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N102 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0‬‬
‫‪N103 M01‬‬
‫‪N104 T10‬‬
‫‪N105 M06‬‬
‫‪N106 G90 G80 G20 G40 G17‬‬
‫‪N107 G00 G54 X0 Y4.0 S500 M03‬‬
‫‪N108 G43 Z8.5 M08 H10‬‬
‫‪N109 G82 G98 Z6.9 F2.5 R7.1‬‬
‫‪N110 B60‬‬
‫‪N111 B120‬‬
‫‪N112 B180‬‬
‫‪N113 B240‬‬
‫‪N114 B300‬‬
‫‪N115 G80 Z10.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N116 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 M05‬‬
‫‪N117 M10‬‬
‫‪N118 M06‬‬
‫‪N119 M30‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎن ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮاآﺰ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )اﻟﻔﺎرزات( اﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻔﺎرزات اﻟﻤﺰودة ﺑﻄﺎوﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ )ﻣﻘﺴﱢﻢ( ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺪوران اﻟﻄﺎوﻟﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪1°‬‬
‫أو أآﺜﺮ‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺰاوي ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )هﺬﻩ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪..،B180 ،B120 :‬ﺇﱁ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﺰ‪‬ﺓ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﳏﺎﻭﺭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﱴ ‪ .001°‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﱴ ﺃﺩﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫‪357‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗ‪‬ﺤﺪ‪‬ﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ (+‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (-‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻋﻤﺎﳍﺎ ﺗ‪‬ﻘﻔﹶﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .M10‬ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺗﲔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﲔ ‪‬ﻳﺤ‪‬ﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ .M11‬ﺗ‪‬ﻘﺮ‪‬ﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳚﺐ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﻔﻴﻒ‪/‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺫﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﲑﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪22<ÜÎ…<sÚ^Þ×Ö<íéñˆ¢]<sÚ]Ö‬‬

‫‪O0002‬‬
‫‪N1 G81 G98 Z6.5 F2.5 R7.1‬‬
‫‪N2 X-3.0 Y6.75‬‬
‫‪N3 P0003 M98‬‬
‫‪N4 X-3.0 Y4.0 Z6.73‬‬
‫‪N5 X3.0‬‬
‫‪N6 G80 X0 Y4.0 M11‬‬
‫‪N7 G91 G00 A60‬‬
‫‪N8 G90 M10‬‬
‫‪N9 M99‬‬

‫‪O0003‬‬
‫‪N1 X3.0‬‬
‫‪N2 Y1.25‬‬
‫‪N3 X-3.0‬‬
‫‪N4 M99‬‬

‫‪O0004‬‬
‫‪N1 G81 G98 Z6.0 F1.5 R7.1‬‬
‫‪N2 G80 M11‬‬
‫‪N3 G91 G00 A60‬‬
‫‪N4 G90 M10‬‬
‫‪N5 M99‬‬

‫‪O0005‬‬
‫‪N1 G90 G00 Z7.1‬‬
‫‪N2 G01 Z6.0 F3.0‬‬
‫‪N3 G42 Y5.0 D50 F2.5‬‬
‫‪N4 G02 J1.0‬‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 358

N5 G01 G40 Y4.0

N6 G00 Z8.5 M11
N7 G91 A60
N8 G90 M10
N9 M99

O0006
N1 G83 G98 Q.15 Z5.8 F4.5 R7.1
N2 P0003 M98
N3 G80 X-3.0 Y6.75 M11
N4 G91 G00 A60
N5 G90 M10
N6 M99

O0007
N1 G84 G98 Z6.0 F7.2 R7.3
N2 P0003 M98
N3 G80 X-3.0 Y6.75 M11
N4 G91 G00 A60
N5 G90 M10
N6 M99

O0008
N1 G83 G98 Q.100 Z6.25 F6.5 R7.1
N2 X3.0
N3 G80 X-3.0 Y4.0 M11
N4 G91 G00 A60
N5 G90 M10
N6 M99

O0009
N1 G81 G98 Z6.4 F8.0 R7.1
N2 X3.0
N3 G80 X-3.0 Y4.0 M11
N4 G91 G00 A60
N5 G90 M10
N6 M99
‫‪359‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪O0010‬‬
‫‪N1 G81 G98 Z6.47 F4.8 R7.1‬‬
‫‪N2 X3.0‬‬
‫‪N3 G80 X-3.0 Y4.0 M11‬‬
‫‪N4 G91 G00 A60‬‬
‫‪N5 G90 M10‬‬
‫‪N6 M99‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪<ÜÎ…<Ù^n¹]I‚ÏÃÚ<sÚ^Þ†e‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(96-4‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0023 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :X‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ :Y ،G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ )ﺻﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎآﺘﻬﺎ ‪ .25‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪360‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪3‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.3125‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ ‪3/8 - 16 UNC‬‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.201‬‬ ‫‪T04‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ ‪1/4 - 20 UNC‬‬ ‫‪T05‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.242‬‬ ‫‪T06‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻞ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.250‬‬ ‫‪T07‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪7/16‬‬ ‫‪T08‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﻟـ ‪D51 = .240‬‬ ‫‪D51‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺸﻦ‬ ‫‪T09‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪7/16‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ ﻟـ ‪D52 = .2187‬‬ ‫‪D52‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ -‬ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﻄﺮ ‪7/16‬‬ ‫‪T10‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪T11‬‬

‫‪sÚ^ÞÖ]<“Þ‬‬
‫‪O0023‬‬
‫)‪(T01 #3 CENTER DRILL‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 T01 M06‬‬
‫‪N20 G54 G00 X.45 Y.375 S611 M03‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G81 G98 Z-.375 R.1 F2.4‬‬
‫‪N35 X19.375 Y9.0‬‬
‫‪N40 X19.500 Y1.2 Z-.26‬‬
‫‪N45 X.28 Y8.0‬‬
‫‪N50 X5.5 Y1.275 Z-.25‬‬
‫‪N55 X1.1 Y8.5 Z-.437‬‬
‫‪N60 X18.0‬‬
‫‪N65 Y.5‬‬
‫‪N70 X10.5 Y1.775‬‬
‫‪N75 G80 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N80 G91 G28 Z0‬‬
‫‪N85 M01‬‬
361 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

(TO2 5/16 DIAMETER TAP DRILL)

N90 T02 M06
N95 G90 G80 G40 G49
N100 G54 G00 X.450 Y.375 S733 M03
N105 G43 Z1.0 H02 M08
N110 G81 G98 Z-.35 R.1 F4.3
N115 X19.375 Y9.0
N120 G80 Z1.0 M09
N125 G91 G28 Z0
N130 M01
(T03 3/8-16 UNC 2B TAP)
N135 T03 M06
N140 G90 G80 G40 G49
N145 G54 G00 X.450 Y.375 S150 M03
N150 G43 Z1.0 H03 M08
N155 G84 G98 Z-.45 R.2 F9.0
N160 X19.375 Y9.0
N165 G80 Z1.0 M09
N170 G91 G28 Z0
N175 M01
(T04 .201 DIAMETER TAP DRILL)
N180 T04 M06
N185 G90 G80 G40 G49
N190 G54 G00 X5.5 Y1.275 S1140 M03
N195 G43 Z1.0 H04 M08
N200 G81 G98 Z-.35 R.1 F6.8
N205 G80 Z1.0 M09
N210 G91 G28 Z0
N215 M01
(T05 1/4-20 UNC 2B TAP)
N220 T05 M06
N225 G90 G80 G40 G49
N230 G54 G00 X5.5 Y1.275 S220 M03
N235 G43 Z1.0 H05 M08
N240 G84 G98 Z-.42 R.2 F11.0
N245 G80 Z1.0 M09
N250 G91 F28 Z0
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 362

N255 M01
(T06 .242 DIAMETER "C" DRILL)
N260 T06 M06
N265 G90 G80 G40 G49
N270 G54 G00 X.28 Y8.0 S996 M03
N275 G43 Z1.0 H06 M08
N280 G81 G98 Z-.350 R.1 F5.0
N285 X19.5 Y1.2
N290 G80 Z1.0 M09
N295 G91 G28 Z0
N300 M01
(T07 .250 DIAMETER REAMER)
N305 T07 M06
N310 G90 G80 G40 G49
N315 G54 G00 X.28 Y8.0 S458 M03
N320 G43 Z1.0 H07 M08
N325 G85 G98 Z-.29 R.1 F2.7
N330 X19.5 Y1.2
N335 G80 Z1.0 M09
N340 G91 G28 Z0
N345 M01
(T08 7/16 DRILL TO OPEN FOR SLOTS)
N350 T08 M06
N355 G90 G80 G40 G49
N360 G54 G00 X1.1 Y8.5 S524 M03
N365 G43 Z1.0 H08 M08
N370 G81 G98 Z-.40 R.1 F3.1
N375 X18.0
N380 Y.5
N385 X10.5 Y1.1775
N390 G80 Z1.0 M09
N395 G91 G28 Z0
N400 M01
(T09 7/16 DIAMETER ROUGHING END-MILL)
(RADIUS COMPENSATION D51 = .240)
N405 T09 M06
N410 G90 G80 G40 G49
363 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N415 G54 G00 X1.1 Y8.5 S524 M03

N420 G43 Z1.0 H09 M08
N425 Z.2
N430 P0003 M98
N435 X18.0 Y.5
N440 P0003 M98
N445 X18.0 Y18.5
N450 P0003 M98
N455 X10.5 Y1.775
N460 G01 Z-.260 F10.0
N465 G41 X11.0 D51 F2.0
N470 Y1.85
N475 G03 X10.7 Y2.15 I-.3
N480 G01 X9.55
N485 G03 X9.25 Y.85 J-.3
N490 G01 Y1.7
N495 G03 X9.55 Y1.4 I.3
N500 G01 X10.7
N505 G03 X11.0 Y1.7 J.3
N510 G01 Y1.775
N515 G40 X10.5
N520 G00 Z.2
N525 X20.25 Y6.5
N530 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N535 G41 Y6.875 D51 F2.0
N540 X18.25
N545 G03 Y6.125 J-.375
N550 G01 X20.25
N555 G40 Y6.5
N560 G00 Z.2
N565 X2.5 Y-.25
N570 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N575 G41 X3.0 D51 F2.0
N580 Y.4
N585 G03 X2.75 Y.65 I-.25
N590 G01 X2.25
N595 G03 X2.0 Y.4 J-.25
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 364

N600 G01 Y-.25

N605 G40 X2.5
N610 G00 Z1. M09
N615 G91 G28 Z0
N620 M01
(T10 7/16 DIAMETER FINISHING END-MILL)
(RADIUS COMPENSATION D52 = .2187)
N625 T10 M06
N630 G90 G80 G40 G49
N635 G54 G00 X1.1 Y8.5 T12 S524 M03
N640 G43 Z1.0 H10 M08
N645 Z.2
N650 P0004 M98
N655 X18.0 Y8.5
N660 P0004 M98
N665 X18.0 Y.5
N670 P0004 M98
N675 X10.5 Y1.775
N680 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N685 G41 X11.0 D52 F2.0
N690 Y1.85
N695 G03 X10.7 Y2.15 I-.3
N700 G01 X9.55
N705 G03 X9.25 Y1.85 J-.3
N710 G01 Y1.7
N715 G03 X9.55 Y1.4 I.3
N720 G01 X10.7
N725 G03 X11.0 Y1.7 J.3
N730 G01 Y1.775
N735 G40 X10.5
N740 G00 Z.2
N745 X20.25 Y6.5
N750 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N755 G41 Y6.875 D52 F2.0
N760 X18.25
N765 G03 Y6.125 J-.375
N770 G01 X20.25
365 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N775 G40 Y6.5

N780 G00 Z.2
N785 X2.5 Y-.25
N790 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N795 G41 X3.0 D52 F2.0
N800 Y.4
N805 G03 X2.75 Y.65 I-.25
N810 G01 X2.25
N815 G03 X2.0 Y.4
N820 G01 Y-.25
N825 G40 X2.5
N830 G00 Z1. M09
N835 G91 G28 Z0
N840 M01
.(‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﳒﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﻑ )ﺍﻟﺸﻨﻔﺮﺓ‬

(97-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

α
X = .5 − ∆X = .5 − r × tan = .5 − .2071 = .2928
2

⎛ α⎞
Y = .5 − ∆Y = .5 − r × tan⎜ 45 − ⎟ = .5 − .2071 = .2928
⎝ 2⎠

(T11 1.0 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫)ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﺰ ﺫﺍﺕ‬

(T11 1.0 DIAMETER END-MILL)
N845 T11 M06
N850 G90 G80 G40 G49
N855 G54 G00 X-.5 Y07072 S229 M03
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 366

N860 G43 Z1.0 H11 M08

N865 G01 Z-.26 F10.0
N870 X.2928 Y10.5 F1.3
N875 G00 Z1.0 M09
N880 G91 G28 Z0
N885 G28 X0 Y0 M05
N890 M30

23<ÜÎ…<sÚ^Þ×Ö<íÃe^jÖ]<íéñˆ¢]<sÚ]Ö]

(‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺸﻦ ﻟﻸﺧﺎﺩﻳﺪ‬

O0003
(SUBPROGRAM OF PROGRAM O0023 FOR ROUGHING SLOTS)
N1 G00 Z.2
N2 G91 G01 Z-.460 F10.0
(D51 = .4375/2 + .01)
N3 G41 Y.25 D51 F1.5
N4 G03 Y-.5 J-.25
N5 G01 X.5
N6 G03 Y.5 J.25
N7 G01 X-.5
N8 G40 Y-.25
N9 G90 G00 Z.2
N10 M99
(‫ﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺎﺩﻳﺪ‬‫)ﻹ‬
O0004
(SUBPROGRAM OF PROGRAM O0023 FOR FINISHING SLOTS)
N1 G00 Z.2
N2 G91 G01 Z-.460 F10.0
(D52 = .4375/2)
N3 G41 Y.25 D52 F1.5
N4 G03 Y-.5 J-.25
N5 G01 X.5
N6 G03 Y.5 J.25
N7 G01 X-.5
N8 G40 Y-.25
N9 G90 G00 Z.2
N10 M99
‫‪367‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫‪ˆè†Ëi<Ù^nÚ‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(98-4‬‬

‫]‪24<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0024 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ‪ :X :‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺮ ‪ :Y ،G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰ‪ :Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺮة ‪6‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺛﻘﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪17/32‬‬ ‫‪T02‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪368‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪27/64‬‬ ‫‪T03‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﺜﻘﻴﺐ ‪ HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪1 1/4‬‬ ‫‪T04‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ذات ﺑﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.750‬‬ ‫‪T05‬‬
‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ – ﺷﻮط ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪T06‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب ﻗﻄﺮ ‪1.0‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻮوظ ‪1/2 - 13‬‬ ‫‪T07‬‬

‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫‪O0024‬‬
‫‪N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N15 T01 M06‬‬
‫‪N20 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S687 M03‬‬
‫‪N25 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08‬‬
‫‪N30 G81 G98 Z-.5 F2.7 R.1‬‬
‫‪N35 X-2.5 Y-2.0‬‬
‫‪N40 7P0002 M98‬‬
‫‪N45 X0 Y-1.5‬‬
‫‪N50 P0003 M98‬‬
‫‪N55 G80 Z1.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N60 G91 G28 Z0 M19‬‬
‫‪N65 M01‬‬
‫‪N70 M06 T02‬‬
‫‪N75 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N80 G54 G00 X-2.5 Y-2.0 S648 M03‬‬
‫‪N85 G43 Z1.0 H02 M08‬‬
‫‪N90 G73 G98 Z-1.45 R.1 F3.8‬‬
‫‪N95 P0002 M98‬‬
‫‪N100 G80 Z5.0 M09‬‬
‫‪N105 G91 G28 Z0 M19‬‬
‫‪N110 M01‬‬
‫‪N115 M06 T03‬‬
‫‪N120 G90 G80 G40 G49‬‬
‫‪N125 G54 G00 X0 Y-1.5 S816 M03‬‬
369 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N130 G43 Z1.0 H03 M08

N135 G73 G98 Z-1.43 R.1 F4.9
N140 P0003 M98
N145 G80 Z1.0 M09
N150 G90 G28 Z0 M19;
N155 M01
N160 T04 M06
N165 G90 G80 G40 G49
N170 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S275 M03
N175 G43 Z1.0 H04 M08
N180 G73 G98 Z-1.65 F1.65 R.1
N185 G80 Z1.0 M09
N190 G91 G28 Z0 M19
N195 M01
N200 T05 M06
N205 G90 G80 G40 G49
N210 G54 G00 X-2.5 Y-2.0 S458 M03
N215 G43 Z1.0 H05 M08
N220 G82 G98 Z-.75 R.1 F3.6
N225 P0002 M98
N230 G80 Z1.0 M09
N235 G91 G28 Z0 M19
N240 M01
N245 T06 M06
N250 G90 G80 G40 G49
N255 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S343 M03
N260 G43 Z1.0 H06 M08
N265 G01 Z-1.25 F50.0
N270 Y.22 F2.7
N275 G02 J-2.7
N280 G01 Y0 F50.0
N285 Z-.83
N290 Y.470 F2.7
N295 G02 J-.470
N300 G01 Y0 F50.0
N305 G00 Z1.0 M09
N310 G91 G28 Z0 M19
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 370

N315 M01
N320 T07 M06
N325 G90 G80 G40 G49
N330 G54 G00 X0 Y0 S343 M03
N335 G43 Z1.0 H07 M08
N340 G01 Z-.85 F50.0
N345 Y.5 F2.7
N350 G03 J-.5
N355 G01 Y0
N360 Z-1.250
N365 Y.250
N370 G03 J-.250
N375 G01 Y0
N380 G00 Z5.0 M09
N385 G91 G28 Z0 M19
N390 M01
N395 T08 M06
N400 G90 G80 G40 G49
N405 G54 G00 X0 Y-1.5 S114 M03
N415 G43 Z1.0 H08 M08
N420 G84 G98 Z-1.3 F8.7 R.2
N425 P0003 M98
N430 G80 Z1.0 M09
N435 G91 G28 Z0 M19
N440 G28 X0 Y0
N445 M30

24<ÜÎ…<sÚ^Þ×Ö<íÃe^jÖ]<íéñˆ¢]<sÚ]Ö]

:‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻮﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬

O0002
(SUBPROGRAM FOR COUNTERBORES)
N1 X-2.5 Y-2.0
N2 Y2.0
N3 X2.5
N4 Y-2.0
N5 M99
‫‪371‬‬ ‫‪Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻏﻲ‬

‫‪O0003‬‬
‫)‪(SUBPROGRAM FOR BOLT CIRCLE‬‬
‫‪N1 X0 Y-1.5‬‬
‫‪N2 X-1.0607 Y-1.0607‬‬
‫‪N3 X-1.5 Y0‬‬
‫‪N4 X-1.0607 Y1.0607‬‬
‫‪N5 X0 Y1.5‬‬
‫‪N6 X1.0607 Y1.0607‬‬
‫‪N7 X1.5 Y0‬‬
‫‪N8 X1.0607 Y-1.0607‬‬
‫‪N9 M99‬‬

‫‪ÄŞÏÖ]<ì]_<†ŞÎ<Ì’Þ<˜èçÃi<ÄÚ<ØéÇjÖ]<†Ú_<ÐéfŞi<x•çè<Ù^nÚ‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0025 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ‪ X :G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻧﺤﺎس أﺻﻔﺮ ﺳﻤﺎآﺔ ‪ .100‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺳﻄﺤﻴﺔ ‪SFM = 300‬‬

‫ﻋﺪد دورات ﻣﺤﻮر اﻵﻟﺔ ‪ S = 6100 RPM‬دورة‪/‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .0015‬‬

‫وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ‪F = 4 × .0015 × 6100 = 36‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 300‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺰ ‪ -‬أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺑﻮاب‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪/‬ﺑﺎب ‪Feed = .0013‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪ - HSS‬ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.1875‬‬
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪372‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(99-4‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﻤﻌﻄﻰ أﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻴﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺷﻮط اﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ أﺧﺬ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬اﺗﱠﺒﻊ اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎت اﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ اﻟﻀﺮورﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺪرﺟﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(100-4‬‬

‫‪Y = 1.6 - Y1‬‬ ‫‪Y1 = b - a‬‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫= ‪tan α‬‬ ‫‪b = 1.0 × tan α = 1.0 × tan 30 o = .5773‬‬
‫‪1.0‬‬
373 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

R R .25
cos α = a = = = .2886
a cos α cos 30 o
Y1 = b − a = .5773 − .2886 = .2887
Y = 1.6 −Y1 = 1.6 − .2887 = 1.3113
Y 2 = 1.6 + d
d
cos α = d = R × cos α = .2165
R
Y 2 = 1.6 + d = 1.6 + .2165 = 1.8165
X 2 = 1.0 − c
c
sin α = c = R × sin α = .125
R
X 2 = 1.0 − c = 1.0 − .125 = .875

25<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<“Þ
O0025
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 G54 G00 X-.2 Y-.2 S6100 M03
N20 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08
N25 G00 Z-.1
N30 G01 G41 X0 D31 F36.0
N35 Y1.3113
N40 X.875 Y1.8165
N45 G02 X1.0 Y1.85 I.185 J-.2165
N50 G01 X1.55
N55 X1.6 Y1.8
N60 Y1.3
N65 G03 X1.7 Y1.2 I.0
N70 G01 X2.125
N75 G03 X2.225 Y1.3 J.1
N80 G01 Y1.8
N85 X2.275 Y1.85
N90 X3.1
N95 X3.25 Y1.7
N100 Y.2
N105 G02 X3.05 Y0 I-.2
N110 G01 X-.02
N115 G40 Y-.2
N120 G00 Z1. M09
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪374‬‬

‫‪N125 G91 G28 Z0 M05‬‬

‫‪N130 G28 X0 Y0‬‬
‫‪N135 M30‬‬

‫‪l^Úç×ù]<àÚ<¼ÏÊ<l^Òç×e<k‰<Ý]‚~j‰^e<gÏm<1000<géÏnjÖ<sÚ^Þ†e<Ù^nÚ‬‬
‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪O0026 :‬‬ ‫اﻵﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺮآﺰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻮﻟﺔ ‪ X :G54‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ Y ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺮى‪ Z ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي‬

‫اﻹﻋﺪادات‪:‬‬

‫اﻟﻤﺎدة‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻذ ‪4140‬‬

‫‪12 × V‬‬
‫= ‪S‬‬ ‫‪= 3307, F = .002 × 3307 = 6.614‬‬
‫‪π.d‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎت‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار اﻹزاﺣﺔ‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻷداة‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻷداة‬

‫‪SFM = 45‬‬ ‫رﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺮآَﺰَة )ﺳﻨﺘﺮة( ‪HSS‬‬ ‫‪T01‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪.052‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(101-4‬‬

‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﰲ ﻛ ﱟﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ /250/‬ﺛﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪26<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<“Þ‬‬

‫‪O0026‬‬
‫‪N001 G90 G00 G80 G40 G49 G54 X.5 Y.25 S3307 M03‬‬
‫‪N002 G43 P0008 L4 Z1.0 M98 H01‬‬
‫‪N003 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 M30‬‬
375 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

O0008
N001 G91 G81 G98 X.15 Z-.05 L250 R.05 F6.6 M08
N002 G80 G00 X-36.15 Y.15
N003 M99

íé•^è†Ö]<l÷^ù]<ÐéfŞi<x•çè<Ù^nÚ
.‫ ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬1/2 ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
27<ÜÎ…<sÚ^ÞÖ]<VÙ^nÚ

O0027
N10 G90 G80 G20 G40 G49
N15 G54 G00 X-.5 Y-.5 S600 M03
N20 G43 Z1.0 H01 M08
N25 G01 Z-.5 F5.0
N30 X-.25 F3.6
N35 Y5.25
N40 X0
N45 G03 X.25 Y5.5 J.25 F2.0
N50 G01 Y5.9036 F3.6
N55 X.5964 Y6.25 F2.5
N60 X2.8554 F3.6
N65 X3.8891 Y5.768 F2.5
N70 G02 X4.25 Y5.2015 I-.2641 J-.5665 F2.0
N75 Y1.8249 F3.6
N80 X3.5 Y1.552
N85 Y.4203 F3.6
N90 X3.3541 Y-.1241 F2.5
N95 X2.8844 Y-.25
N100 X-.25 F3.6
N105 G00 Z1. M09
N110 G28 Z1.0
N115 G28 X-.2500 Y-.2500 M05
N120 M30
‫]‪Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ‬‬ ‫‪376‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(102-4‬‬

‫ﻧﻔﺬت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻌﻮدة ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮح ﻟﻸﺟﺰاء اﻷآﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪N50 G01 Y5.9036 F3.6‬‬

‫‪Y = 6.0 − .2 + ∆Y‬‬

‫‪r = .25‬‬ ‫‪α = 45 o‬‬
‫⎛‬ ‫⎞‪α‬‬
‫‪∆Y = r x tan ⎜ 45 - ⎟ = .1036‬‬
‫⎝‬ ‫⎠‪2‬‬

‫‪Y = 6.0 − .2 + .1036 = 5.9036‬‬

‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪(103-4‬‬
377 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N55 X.5964 Y6.25 F2.5

X = .5 + .2 − ∆X
r = .25 α = 45 o
α
∆X = r × tan = .1036
2

X = .5 + .2 − .1036 = .5964

(104-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

N60 X2.8554 F3.6

X = 2.8 + ∆X
r = .25 α = 25 o
α
∆X = r × tan = .0554
2

X = 2.8 + .0554 = 2.8445

(105-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

N65 X3.8891 Y5.7680 F2.5

X = 4.0 − α + ∆X
R = .375 α = 25 o
⎛ α⎞
a = R × tan⎜ 45 o − ⎟ × cos α
⎝ 2⎠
a = .2165 r = .250
∆X = r × sin α = .1056
X = 4.0 − .2165 + .1056 = 3.8891
Y = 6.0 − d + b + ∆Y
c = 4 − 2.8 = 1.2
d
tan α = d = c × tan α = .5595
c
⎛ α⎞
b = R × tan⎜ 45 o − ⎟ × sin α = .1009
⎝ 2⎠ (106-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
∆Y = r × cos α = .2266
Y = 6.0 − .5595 + .1009 + .2266 = 5.7680
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 378

N70 G02 X4.25 Y5.2015 I-.2641 J-.5665 F2.0

Y = 6.0 − d − I d = .5595
⎛ α⎞
I = R × tan⎜ 45° − ⎟ = .2390
⎝ 2⎠
Y = 6.0 − .5595 − .2390 = 5.2015
I = (R + r ) × sin α = .2641
J = (R + r ) × cos α = .5665

(107-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

N75 G01 Y1.8249 F3.6

Y = 2.0 − ∆Y
r = .25 α = 20 o
⎛ α⎞
∆Y = r × tan⎜ 45 o − ⎟ = .1751
⎝ 2⎠

Y = 2.0 − .1751 = 1.8249

(108-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

N80 X3.5 Y1.5520

Y = 2.0 − g − ∆Y

f = 4 − 3.25 = .750 α = 20 o
g
tan α = g = f × tan α = .2729
f
α
∆Y = r × tan 45 o − = .1751
2
Y = 2.0 − .2729 − .1751 = 1.5520

(109-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
379 Dí¥¹]<l]‡…^ËÖ]E<ØéÇjÖ]<ˆÒ]†Ú<Hğ^éf‰^u<^ãe<ÜÓvj¹]<l÷ù]<í¥†e :4

N85 Y.4203 F3.6

Y = .08 + h − ∆Y

(110-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

h
α = 75 o tan α =
K
h = K × tan α = .3732
⎛ α⎞
∆Y = r × tan⎜ 45 o − ⎟ = .0329
⎝ 2⎠
Y = .08 + h − ∆Y = .4203 (111-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

N90 X3.3541 Y-.1241 F2.5

Y = .08 − ∆Y α = 75 o
cos [(α + β) / 2]
Y =r × β = 15 o r = .250
cos [(α − β) / 2]

∆Y = .2041 Y = .08 − .2041 = −.1241

(112-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
Äe]†Ö]<Ø’ËÖ] 380

N95 X2.8844 Y-.25

(113-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

X = 3.15 - b + ∆X

(114-4) ‫اﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬

.08
tan α = α = 15 o
b
.08
b = = .2985 r = .250
tan α
α
∆X = r × tan = .0329
2

X = 3.15 − .2985 + .0329 = 2.8844